Deprecated: The each() function is deprecated. This message will be suppressed on further calls in /home/zhenxiangba/zhenxiangba.com/public_html/phproxy-improved-master/index.php on line 456
JP6933232B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents
[go: Go Back, main page]

JP6933232B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Pachinko machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP6933232B2
JP6933232B2 JP2019151639A JP2019151639A JP6933232B2 JP 6933232 B2 JP6933232 B2 JP 6933232B2 JP 2019151639 A JP2019151639 A JP 2019151639A JP 2019151639 A JP2019151639 A JP 2019151639A JP 6933232 B2 JP6933232 B2 JP 6933232B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
gear
tooth
layer
slide
reversing
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related
Application number
JP2019151639A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2019195715A (en
JP2019195715A5 (en
Inventor
岡村 鉉
鉉 岡村
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2018080313A external-priority patent/JP6575632B2/en
Application filed by Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd filed Critical Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Priority to JP2019151639A priority Critical patent/JP6933232B2/en
Publication of JP2019195715A publication Critical patent/JP2019195715A/en
Publication of JP2019195715A5 publication Critical patent/JP2019195715A5/ja
Priority to JP2021134313A priority patent/JP2021183170A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP6933232B2 publication Critical patent/JP6933232B2/en
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Pinball Game Machines (AREA)

Description

本発明は、パチンコ機などの遊技機に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、駆動力の伝達にギアを用いる遊技機がある(特許文献1)。 In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that use gears to transmit driving force (Patent Document 1).

特開2012−217702号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217702

しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、メンテナンス性に関して改良の余地があるという問題点があった。 However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of maintainability.

本発明は、上記例示した問題点を解決するためになされたものであり、メンテナンス性の良好な遊技機を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having good maintainability.

この目的を達成するために請求項1記載の遊技機は、ベース部材と、そのベース部材に支持される第1ギア部材および第2ギア部材とを備え、少なくとも前記第1ギア部材は第1軸を中心に回転可能とされ、前記第1ギア部材および第2ギア部材は、前記第1軸と直交する所定平面に沿った動作方向で動作可能に前記ベース部材に支持される本体部と、その本体部から前記動作方向に対して前記所定平面上で交差する方向へ張り出される張出部と、を備え、前記第1ギア部材または第2ギア部材の一方の部材の有する前記張出部は、前記動作方向の面が前記第1ギア部材または第2ギア部材の他方の部材の有する前記張出部に当接可能に構成され、前記他方の部材を押進可能に構成され、前記第2ギア部材は、前記張出部の前記第1軸方向の側面に覆設される板状部を備え、その板状部が、前記第1軸方向視において前記第1ギア部材の前記張出部であって前記第2ギア部材と当接している前記張出部に重なり可能に形成される遊技機であって、前記板状部は、前記第2ギア部材の前記張出部の張出先端側から張出基端側へえぐられて形成される切り欠き部を備える。 In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a base member and a first gear member and a second gear member supported by the base member, and at least the first gear member is a first shaft. The first gear member and the second gear member are supported by the base member so as to be rotatable in an operating direction along a predetermined plane orthogonal to the first axis, and a main body thereof. The overhanging portion provided with an overhanging portion extending from the main body portion in a direction intersecting the predetermined plane with respect to the operating direction, and the overhanging portion included in one of the first gear member and the second gear member The surface in the operating direction is configured to be able to come into contact with the overhanging portion of the first gear member or the other member of the second gear member, and the other member is configured to be pushable. The gear member includes a plate-shaped portion that is overlaid on the side surface of the overhanging portion in the first axial direction, and the plate-shaped portion is the overhanging portion of the first gear member in the first axial direction. The game machine is formed so as to be able to overlap the overhanging portion that is in contact with the second gear member, and the plate-shaped portion is the overhanging tip of the overhanging portion of the second gear member. It is provided with a notch formed by being scooped out from the side to the overhanging base end side.

請求項2記載の遊技機は、請求項1記載の遊技機において、基板ボックスを備える。The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes a board box in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

請求項1記載の遊技機によれば、遊技機のメンテナンス性を良好にすることができる。 According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the maintainability of the gaming machine can be improved.

請求項2記載の遊技機によれば、請求項1記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、基板ボックスに基板を収容することができる。According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the substrate can be housed in the substrate box.

第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機の正面図である。It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. パチンコ機の遊技盤の正面図である。It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の背面図である。It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. 動作ユニットの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. 分解した動作ユニットを正面視した動作ユニットの分解正面斜視図である。It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. 分解した動作ユニットを正面視した動作ユニットの分解正面斜視図である。It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. 動作ユニットの正面図である。It is a front view of the operation unit. (a)及び(b)は、複合動作ユニットの正面斜視図である。(A) and (b) are front perspective views of the composite operation unit. 複合動作ユニットの分解正面斜視図である。It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. 複合動作ユニットの分解背面斜視図である。It is an exploded rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. 一対のスライド部材、背面カバー、第1ギア群及び第2ギア群の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, a 1st gear group and a 2nd gear group. 一対のスライド部材、背面カバー、第1ギア群及び第2ギア群の背面分解斜視図である。It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, a 1st gear group and a 2nd gear group. 半月部材の正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of a half moon member. 半月部材の背面斜視図である。It is a rear perspective view of a half moon member. 複合動作ユニットの部分正面図である。It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (a)は、図16のXVIIa−XVIIa線における複合動作ユニットの部分断面図であり、(b)は、(a)から駆動装置を移動させた後の複合動作ユニットの部分断面図である。(A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit on the line XVIIa-XVIIa of FIG. 16, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit after moving the drive device from (a). 複合動作ユニットの部分正面図である。It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (a)は、図18のXIXa−XIXa線における複合動作ユニットの部分断面図であり、(b)は、(a)から駆動モータを駆動ギアから分離させた後の複合動作ユニットの部分断面図である。(A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in the XIXa-XIXa line of FIG. 18, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit after separating the drive motor from the drive gear from (a). Is. (a)は、二層ギアの正面図であり、(b)は、二層ギアの背面図である。(A) is a front view of the two-layer gear, and (b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear. (a)は、複合動作ユニットの背面図であり、(b)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a)は、複合動作ユニットの背面図であり、(b)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a)及び(b)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) and (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. (a)は、複合動作ユニットの背面図であり、(b)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a)は、複合動作ユニットの背面図であり、(b)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a)及び(b)は、複合動作ユニットの部分背面図である。(A) and (b) are partial rear views of the composite operation unit. 第2実施形態における一対のスライド部材の正面図である。It is a front view of the pair of slide members in 2nd Embodiment. 一対のスライド部材の正面図である。It is a front view of a pair of slide members. (a)は、第3実施形態における二層ギアの正面図であり、(b)は、二層ギアの底面図であり、(c)は、二層ギアの側面図である。(A) is a front view of the two-layer gear in the third embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is a side view of the two-layer gear. (a)は、反転ギアの正面図であり、(b)は、反転ギアの底面図であり、(c)は、反転ギアの側面図である。(A) is a front view of the reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a side view of the reversing gear. (a)は、第4実施形態における二層ギアの正面図であり、(b)は、二層ギアの底面図であり、(c)は、図31(b)のXXXIc−XXXIc線における二層ギアの断面図である。(A) is a front view of the two-layer gear according to the fourth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is the two in the XXXIc-XXXIc line of FIG. 31 (b). It is sectional drawing of the layer gear. (a)は、反転ギアの正面図であり、(b)は、反転ギアの底面図であり、(c)は、図32(a)の矢印XXXIIc方向視における反転ギアの部分側面図である。(A) is a front view of the reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a partial side view of the reversing gear in the direction of arrow XXXIIc of FIG. 32 (a). .. 第5実施形態における二層ギアの正面図である。It is a front view of the two-layer gear in the fifth embodiment. 第2ギア群の部分正面図である。It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. 第2ギア群の部分正面図である。It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. 第6実施形態における二層ギアの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear in the sixth embodiment. 二層ギア及び反転ギアの正面図である。It is a front view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (a)から(c)は、第7実施形態における二層ギアの背面図である。(A) to (c) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the seventh embodiment. (a)から(e)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) to (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. (a)及び(b)は、複合動作ユニットの正面図である。(A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (a)及び(b)は、複合動作ユニットの正面図である。(A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (a)から(e)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) to (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. (a)及び(b)は、複合動作ユニットの正面図である。(A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (a)及び(b)は、複合動作ユニットの正面図である。(A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. 二層ギアの速度変化を示すグラフである。It is a graph which shows the speed change of a two-layer gear. (a)及び(b)は、第8実施形態における二層ギアの背面図である。(A) and (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the eighth embodiment. (a)から(e)は、二層ギア及び反転ギアの背面図である。(A) to (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. 二層ギアの回転速度を示すグラフである。It is a graph which shows the rotation speed of a two-layer gear.

以下、本発明の実施形態について、添付図面を参照して説明する。まず、図1から図26を参照し、第1実施形態として、本発明をパチンコ遊技機(以下、単に「パチンコ機」という)10に適用した場合の一実施形態について説明する。図1は、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10の正面図であり、図2はパチンコ機10の遊技盤13の正面図であり、図3はパチンコ機10の後面図である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

図1に示すように、パチンコ機10は、略矩形状に組み合わせた木枠により外殻が形成される外枠11と、その外枠11と略同一の外形形状に形成され外枠11に対して開閉可能に支持された内枠12とを備えている。外枠11には、内枠12を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ18が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ18が設けられた側を開閉の軸として内枠12が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。 As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

内枠12には、多数の釘や入賞口63,64等を有する遊技盤13(図2参照)が裏面側から着脱可能に装着される。この遊技盤13の正面を球(遊技球)が流下することにより弾球遊技が行われる。なお、内枠12には、球を遊技盤13の正面領域に発射する球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)やその球発射ユニット112aから発射された球を遊技盤13の正面領域まで誘導する発射レール(図示せず)等が取り付けられている。 A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

内枠12の正面側には、その正面上側を覆う正面枠14と、その下側を覆う下皿ユニット15とが設けられている。正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ19が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ19が設けられた側を開閉の軸として正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。なお、内枠12の施錠と正面枠14の施錠とは、シリンダ錠20の鍵穴21に専用の鍵を差し込んで所定の操作を行うことでそれぞれ解除される。 On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

正面枠14は、装飾用の樹脂部品や電気部品等を組み付けたものであり、その略中央部には略楕円形状に開口形成された窓部14cが設けられている。正面枠14の裏面側には2枚の板ガラスを有するガラスユニット16が配設され、そのガラスユニット16を介して遊技盤13の正面がパチンコ機10の正面側に視認可能となっている。 The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

正面枠14には、球を貯留する上皿17が正面側へ張り出して上面を開放した略箱状に形成されており、この上皿17に賞球や貸出球などが排出される。上皿17の底面は正面視(図1参照)右側に下降傾斜して形成され、その傾斜により上皿17に投入された球が球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)へと案内される。また、上皿17の上面には、枠ボタン22が設けられている。この枠ボタン22は、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)で表示される演出のステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチの演出内容を変更したりする場合などに、遊技者により操作される。 In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

正面枠14には、その周囲(例えばコーナー部分)に各種ランプ等の発光手段が設けられている。これら発光手段は、大当たり時や所定のリーチ時等における遊技状態の変化に応じて、点灯又は点滅することにより発光態様が変更制御され、遊技中の演出効果を高める役割を果たす。窓部14cの周縁には、LED等の発光手段を内蔵した電飾部29〜33が設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、これら電飾部29〜33が大当たりランプ等の演出ランプとして機能し、大当たり時やリーチ演出時等には内蔵するLEDの点灯や点滅によって各電飾部29〜33が点灯または点滅して、大当たり中である旨、或いは大当たり一歩手前のリーチ中である旨が報知される。また、正面枠14の正面視(図1参照)左上部には、LED等の発光手段が内蔵され賞球の払い出し中とエラー発生時とを表示可能な表示ランプ34が設けられている。 The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

また、右側の電飾部32下側には、正面枠14の裏面側を視認できるように裏面側より透明樹脂を取り付けて小窓35が形成され、遊技盤13正面の貼着スペースK1(図2参照)に貼付される証紙等がパチンコ機10の正面から視認可能とされている。また、パチンコ機10においては、より煌びやかさを醸し出すために、電飾部29〜33の周りの領域にクロムメッキを施したABS樹脂製のメッキ部材36が取り付けられている。 Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

窓部14cの下方には、貸球操作部40が配設されている。貸球操作部40には、度数表示部41と、球貸しボタン42と、返却ボタン43とが設けられている。パチンコ機10の側方に配置されるカードユニット(球貸しユニット)(図示せず)に紙幣やカード等を投入した状態で貸球操作部40が操作されると、その操作に応じて球の貸出が行われる。具体的には、度数表示部41はカード等の残額情報が表示される領域であり、内蔵されたLEDが点灯して残額情報として残額が数字で表示される。球貸しボタン42は、カード等(記録媒体)に記録された情報に基づいて貸出球を得るために操作されるものであり、カード等に残額が存在する限りにおいて貸出球が上皿17に供給される。返却ボタン43は、カードユニットに挿入されたカード等の返却を求める際に操作される。なお、カードユニットを介さずに球貸し装置等から上皿17に球が直接貸し出されるパチンコ機、いわゆる現金機では貸球操作部40が不要となるが、この場合には、貸球操作部40の設置部分に飾りシール等を付加して部品構成は共通のものとしても良い。カードユニットを用いたパチンコ機と現金機との共通化を図ることができる。 A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

上皿17の下側に位置する下皿ユニット15には、その中央部に上皿17に貯留しきれなかった球を貯留するための下皿50が上面を開放した略箱状に形成されている。下皿50の右側には、球を遊技盤13の正面へ打ち込むために遊技者によって操作される操作ハンドル51が配設される。 In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

操作ハンドル51の内部には、球発射ユニット112aの駆動を許可するためのタッチセンサ51aと、押下操作している期間中には球の発射を停止する発射停止スイッチ51bと、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)を電気抵抗の変化により検出する可変抵抗器(図示せず)などが内蔵されている。操作ハンドル51が遊技者によって右回りに回動操作されると、タッチセンサ51aがオンされると共に可変抵抗器の抵抗値が回動操作量に対応して変化し、その可変抵抗器の抵抗値に対応した強さ(発射強度)で球が発射され、これにより遊技者の操作に対応した飛び量で遊技盤13の正面へ球が打ち込まれる。また、操作ハンドル51が遊技者により操作されていない状態においては、タッチセンサ51aおよび発射停止スイッチ51bがオフとなっている。 Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

下皿50の正面下方部には、下皿50に貯留された球を下方へ排出する際に操作するための球抜きレバー52が設けられている。この球抜きレバー52は、常時、右方向に付勢されており、その付勢に抗して左方向へスライドさせることにより、下皿50の底面に形成された底面口が開口して、その底面口から球が自然落下して排出される。この球抜きレバー52の操作は、通常、下皿50の下方に下皿50から排出された球を受け取る箱(一般に「千両箱」と称される)を置いた状態で行われる。下皿50の右方には、上述したように操作ハンドル51が配設され、下皿50の左方には灰皿53が取り付けられている。 A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

図2に示すように、遊技盤13は、正面視略正方形状に切削加工したベース板60に、球案内用の多数の釘(図示せず)や風車(可動部材310を図示し、その他は図示せず)の他、レール61,62、一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、第一可変入賞装置65、第2可変入賞装置(図示せず)、スルーゲート67、可変表示装置ユニット80等を組み付けて構成され、その周縁部が内枠12(図1参照)の裏面側に取り付けられる。ベース板60は光透過性の樹脂材料からなり、その正面側からベース板60の後面側に配設された各種構造体を遊技者に視認させることが可能に形成される。一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、第1可変入賞装置65、第2可変入賞装置(図示せず)、可変表示装置ユニット80は、ルータ加工によってベース板60に形成された貫通穴に配設され、遊技盤13の正面側からタッピングネジ等により固定されている。 As shown in FIG. 2, in the game board 13, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown) on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. (Not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), through gate 67. , The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

遊技盤13の正面中央部分は、正面枠14の窓部14c(図1参照)を通じて内枠12の正面側から視認することができる。以下に、主に図2を参照して、遊技盤13の構成について説明する。 The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

遊技盤13の正面には、帯状の金属板を略円弧状に屈曲加工して形成した外レール62が植立され、その外レール62の内側位置には外レール62と同様に帯状の金属板で形成した円弧状の内レール61が植立される。この内レール61と外レール62とにより遊技盤13の正面外周が囲まれ、遊技盤13とガラスユニット16(図1参照)とにより前後が囲まれることにより、遊技盤13の正面には、球の挙動により遊技が行われる遊技領域が形成される。遊技領域は、遊技盤13の正面であって2本のレール61,62とレール間を繋ぐ樹脂製の外縁部材73とにより区画して形成される領域(入賞口等が配設され、発射された球が流下する領域)である。 An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

2本のレール61,62は、球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)から発射された球を遊技盤13上部へ案内するために設けられたものである。内レール61の先端部分(図2の左上部)には戻り球防止部材68が取り付けられ、一旦、遊技盤13の上部へ案内された球が再度球案内通路内に戻ってしまうといった事態が防止される。外レール62の先端部(図2の右上部)には、球の最大飛翔部分に対応する位置に返しゴム69が取り付けられ、所定以上の勢いで発射された球は、返しゴム69に当たって、勢いが減衰されつつ中央部側へ跳ね返される。 The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

遊技領域の正面視左側下部(図2の左側下部)には、発光手段である複数のLED及び7セグメント表示器を備える第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bが配設されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、主制御装置110(図4参照)で行われる各制御に応じた表示がなされるものであり、主にパチンコ機10の遊技状態の表示が行われる。本実施形態では、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞したか、第2入賞口640へ入賞したかに応じて使い分けられるように構成されている。具体的には、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Aが作動し、一方で、球が、第2入賞口640へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Bが作動するように構成されている。 In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、LEDにより、パチンコ機10が確変中か時短中か通常中であるかを点灯状態により示したり、変動中であるか否かを点灯状態により示したり、停止図柄が確変大当たりに対応した図柄か普通大当たりに対応した図柄か外れ図柄であるかを点灯状態により示したり、保留球数を点灯状態により示すと共に、7セグメント表示装置により、大当たり中のラウンド数やエラー表示を行う。なお、複数のLEDは、それぞれのLEDの発光色(例えば、赤、緑、青)が異なるよう構成され、その発光色の組み合わせにより、少ないLEDでパチンコ機10の各種遊技状態を示唆することができる。 Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

尚、本パチンコ機10では、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640へ入賞があったことを契機として抽選が行われる。パチンコ機10は、その抽選において、大当たりか否かの当否判定(大当たり抽選)を行うと共に、大当たりと判定した場合はその大当たり種別の判定も行う。ここで判定される大当たり種別としては、15R確変大当たり、4R確変大当たり、15R通常大当たりが用意されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bには、変動終了後の停止図柄として抽選の結果が大当たりであるか否かが示されるだけでなく、大当たりである場合はその大当たり種別に応じた図柄が示される。 In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

ここで、「15R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことであり、「4R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が4ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことである。また、「15R通常大当たり」は、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に、低確率状態へ移行すると共に、所定の変動回数の間(例えば、100変動回数)は時短状態となる大当たりのことである。 Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

また、「高確率状態」とは、大当たり終了後に付加価値としてその後の大当たり確率がアップした状態、いわゆる確率変動中(確変中)の時をいい、換言すれば、特別遊技状態へ移行し易い遊技の状態のことである。本実施形態における高確率状態(確変中)は、後述する第2図柄の当たり確率がアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態を含む。「低確率状態」とは、確変中でない時をいい、大当たり確率が通常の状態、即ち、確変の時より大当たり確率が低い状態をいう。また、「低確率状態」のうちの時短状態(時短中)とは、大当たり確率が通常の状態であると共に、大当たり確率がそのままで第2図柄の当たり確率のみがアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態のことをいう。一方、パチンコ機10が通常中とは、確変中でも時短中でもない遊技の状態(大当たり確率も第2図柄の当たり確率もアップしていない状態)である。 In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

確変中や時短中は、第2図柄の当たり確率がアップするだけではなく、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間も変更され、通常中と比して長い時間が設定される。電動役物640aが開放された状態(開放状態)にある場合は、その電動役物640aが閉鎖された状態(閉鎖状態)にある場合と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態となる。よって、確変中や時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い状態となり、大当たり抽選が行われる回数を増やすことができる。 During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

なお、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aの開放時間を変更するのではなく、または、その開放時間を変更することに加えて、1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数を通常中よりも増やす変更を行うものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2図柄の当たり確率は変更せず、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間および1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数の少なくとも一方を変更するものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間や、1回の当たりで電動役物640aを開放する回数はせず、第2図柄の当たり確率だけを、通常中と比してアップするよう変更するものであってもよい。 In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

遊技領域には、球が入賞することにより5個から15個の球が賞球として払い出される複数の一般入賞口63が配設されている。また、遊技領域の中央部分には、可変表示装置ユニット80が配設されている。可変表示装置ユニット80には、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640への入賞(始動入賞)をトリガとして、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおける変動表示と同期させながら、第3図柄の変動表示を行う液晶ディスプレイ(以下単に「表示装置」と略す)で構成された第3図柄表示装置81と、スルーゲート67の球の通過をトリガとして第2図柄を変動表示するLEDで構成される第2図柄表示装置(図示せず)とが設けられている。また、可変表示装置ユニット80には、第3図柄表示装置81の外周を囲むようにして、センターフレーム86が配設されている。 In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

第3図柄表示装置81は9インチサイズの大型の液晶ディスプレイで構成されるものであり、表示制御装置114(図4参照)によって表示内容が制御されることにより、例えば上、中及び下の3つの図柄列が表示される。各図柄列は複数の図柄(第3図柄)によって構成され、これらの第3図柄が図柄列毎に横スクロールして第3図柄表示装置81の表示画面上にて第3図柄が可変表示されるようになっている。本実施形態の第3図柄表示装置81は、主制御装置110(図4参照)の制御に伴った遊技状態の表示が第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bで行われるのに対して、その第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bの表示に応じた装飾的な表示を行うものである。なお、表示装置に代えて、例えばリール等を用いて第3図柄表示装置81を構成するようにしても良い。 The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

第2図柄表示装置は、球がスルーゲート67を通過する毎に表示図柄(第2図柄(図示せず))としての「○」の図柄と「×」の図柄とを所定時間交互に点灯させる変動表示を行うものである。パチンコ機10では、球がスルーゲート67を通過したことが検出されると、当たり抽選が行われる。その当たり抽選の結果、当たりであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第2図柄の変動表示後に「○」の図柄が停止表示される。また、当たり抽選の結果、外れであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第3図柄の変動表示後に「×」の図柄が停止表示される。 The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

パチンコ機10は、第2図柄表示装置における変動表示が所定図柄(本実施形態においては「○」の図柄)で停止した場合に、第2入賞口640に付随された電動役物640aが所定時間だけ作動状態となる(開放される)よう構成されている。 In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間は、遊技状態が通常中の場合よりも、確変中または時短中の方が短くなるように設定される。これにより、確変中および時短中は、第2図柄の変動表示が短い時間で行われるので、当たり抽選を通常中よりも多く行うことができる。よって、当たり抽選において当たりとなる機会が増えるので、第2入賞口640の電動役物640aが開放状態となる機会を遊技者に多く与えることができる。よって、確変中および時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態とすることができる。 The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

なお、確変中または時短中において、当たり確率を高める、1回に当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を増やすなど、その他の方法によっても、確変中または時短中に第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態としている場合は、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を遊技状態にかかわらず一定としてもよい。一方、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を、確変中または時短中において通常中よりも短く設定する場合は、当たり確率を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよいし、また、1回の当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよい。 In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

スルーゲート67は、可変表示装置ユニット80の下側の領域における右方において遊技盤に組み付けられ、遊技盤に発射された球のうち、遊技盤の右方を流下する球の一部が通過可能に構成されている。スルーゲート67を球が通過すると、第2図柄の当たり抽選が行われる。当たり抽選の後、第2図柄表示装置にて変動表示を行い、当たり抽選の結果が当たりであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「○」の図柄を表示し、当たり抽選の結果が外れであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「×」の図柄を表示する。 The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

球のスルーゲート67の通過回数は、合計で最大4回まで保留され、その保留球数が上述した第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより表示されると共に第2図柄保留ランプ(図示せず)においても点灯表示される。第2図柄保留ランプは、最大保留数分の4つ設けられ、第3図柄表示装置81の下方に左右対称に配設されている。 The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

なお、第2図柄の変動表示は、本実施形態のように、第2図柄表示装置において複数のランプの点灯と非点灯を切り換えることにより行うものの他、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81の一部を使用して行うようにしても良い。同様に、第2図柄保留ランプの点灯を第3図柄表示装置81の一部で行うようにしても良い。また、スルーゲート67の球の通過に対する最大保留球数は4回に限定されるものでなく、3回以下、又は、5回以上の回数(例えば、8回)に設定しても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け数は1つに限定されるものではなく、複数(例えば、2つ)であっても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け位置は可変表示装置ユニット80の右方に限定されるものではなく、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方でも良い。また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより保留球数が示されるので、第2図柄保留ランプにより点灯表示を行わないものとしてもよい。 The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

可変表示装置ユニット80の下方には、球が入賞し得る第1入賞口64が配設されている。この第1入賞口64へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第1入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第1入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Aで示される。 Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

一方、第1入賞口64の正面視右方には、球が入賞し得る第2入賞口640が配設されている。この第2入賞口640へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第2入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第2入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Bで示される。 On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

また、第1入賞口64および第2入賞口640は、それぞれ、球が入賞すると5個の球が賞球として払い出される入賞口の1つにもなっている。なお、本実施形態においては、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを同じに構成したが、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを異なる数、例えば、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を3個とし、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を5個として構成してもよい。 In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

第2入賞口640には電動役物640aが付随されている。この電動役物640aは開閉可能に構成されており、通常は電動役物640aが閉鎖状態(縮小状態)となって、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しにくい状態となっている。一方、スルーゲート67への球の通過を契機として行われる第2図柄の変動表示の結果、「○」の図柄が第2図柄表示装置に表示された場合、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となり、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しやすい状態となる。 An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

上述した通り、確変中および時短中は、通常中と比して第2図柄の当たり確率が高く、また、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間も短いので、第2図柄の変動表示において「○」の図柄が表示され易くなって、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となる回数が増える。更に、確変中および時短中は、電動役物640aが開放される時間も、通常中より長くなる。よって、確変中および時短中は、通常時と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態を作ることができる。 As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

ここで、第1入賞口64に球が入賞した場合と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合とで、大当たりとなる確率は、低確率状態であっても高確率状態でも同一である。しかしながら、大当たりとなった場合に選定される大当たりの種別として15R確変大当たりとなる確率は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合のほうが第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合よりも高く設定されている。一方、第1入賞口64は、第2入賞口640にあるような電動役物は有しておらず、球が常時入賞可能な状態となっている。 Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

よって、通常中においては、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物が閉鎖状態にある場合が多く、第2入賞口640に入賞しづらいので、電動役物のない第1入賞口64へ向けて、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「左打ち」)、第1入賞口64への入賞によって大当たり抽選の機会を多く得て、大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。 Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

一方、確変中や時短中は、スルーゲート67に球を通過させることで、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放状態となりやすく、第2入賞口640に入賞しやすい状態であるので、第2入賞口640へ向けて、可変表示装置80の右方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「右打ち」)、スルーゲート67を通過させて電動役物を開放状態にすると共に、第2入賞口640への入賞によって15R確変大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。 On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

このように、本実施形態のパチンコ機10は、パチンコ機10の遊技状態(確変中であるか、時短中であるか、通常中であるか)に応じて、遊技者に対し、球の発射の仕方を「左打ち」と「右打ち」とに変えさせることができる。よって、遊技者に対して、球の打ち方に変化をもたらすことができるので、遊技を楽しませることができる。 As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

第1入賞口64の上方右側には第1可変入賞装置65が配設されており、その略中央部分に特定入賞口65aが設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、第1入賞口64又は第2入賞口640への入賞に起因して行われた大当たり抽選が大当たりとなると、所定時間(変動時間)が経過した後に、大当たりの停止図柄となるよう第1図柄表示装置37A又は第1図柄表示装置37Bを点灯させると共に、その大当たりに対応した停止図柄を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させて、大当たりの発生が示される。その後、球が入賞し易い特別遊技状態(大当たり)に遊技状態が遷移する。この特別遊技状態として、通常時には閉鎖されている特定入賞口65aが、所定時間(例えば、30秒経過するまで、或いは、球が10個入賞するまで)開放される。 A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

この特定入賞口65aは、所定時間が経過すると閉鎖され、その閉鎖後、再度、その特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放される。この特定入賞口65aの開閉動作は、最高で例えば15回(15ラウンド)繰り返し可能にされている。この開閉動作が行われている状態が、遊技者にとって有利な特別遊技状態の一形態であり、遊技者には、遊技上の価値(遊技価値)の付与として通常時より多量の賞球の払い出しが行われる。 The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

第1可変入賞装置65は、具体的には、特定入賞口65aを覆う正面視三角形状の開閉板と、その開閉板の下辺を軸として右側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイド(図示せず)とを備えている。特定入賞口65aは、通常時は、球が入賞できないか又は入賞し難い閉状態になっている。大当たりの際には大開放口ソレノイドを駆動して開閉板を右側に傾倒し、球が特定入賞口65aに入賞しやすい開状態を一時的に形成し、その開状態と通常時の閉状態との状態を交互に繰り返すように作動する。 Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a front-view triangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown) for driving the opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state of.

なお、上記した形態に特別遊技状態は限定されるものではない。特定入賞口65aとは別に開閉される大開放口を遊技領域に設け、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおいて大当たりに対応したLEDが点灯した場合に、特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放され、その特定入賞口65aの開放中に、球が特定入賞口65a内へ入賞することを契機として特定入賞口65aとは別に設けられた大開放口が所定時間、所定回数開放される遊技状態を特別遊技状態として形成するようにしても良い。また、特定入賞口65aは1つに限るものではなく、1つ若しくは2以上の複数(例えば3つ)を配置しても良く、また配置位置も第1入賞口64の下方右側や、第1入賞口64の下方左側に限らず、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方でも良い。 The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

遊技盤13の下側における右隅部には、証紙や識別ラベル等を貼着するための貼着スペースK1が設けられ、貼着スペースK1に貼られた証紙等は、正面枠14の小窓35(図1参照)を通じて視認することができる。 In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the certificate stamp, etc. attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

遊技盤13には、第1アウト口71が設けられている。遊技領域を流下する球であって、いずれの入賞口63,64,65a,640にも入賞しなかった球は、第1アウト口71を通って図示しない球排出路へと案内される。第1アウト口71は、第1入賞口64の下方に配設される。 The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

遊技盤13には、球の落下方向を適宜分散、調整等するために多数の釘が植設されているとともに、風車等の各種部材(役物)とが配設されている。本実施形態においては、風車の内の一つ(可動部材310と称す)が遊技盤13の正面視左側上方に配設され、図2において図示されている。 A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is shown in FIG.

図3に示すように、パチンコ機10の後面側には、制御基板ユニット90,91と、裏パックユニット94とが主に備えられている。制御基板ユニット90は、主基板(主制御装置110)と音声ランプ制御基板(音声ランプ制御装置113)と表示制御基板(表示制御装置114)とが搭載されてユニット化されている。制御基板ユニット91は、払出制御基板(払出制御装置111)と発射制御基板(発射制御装置112)と電源基板(電源装置115)とカードユニット接続基板116とが搭載されてユニット化されている。 As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

裏パックユニット94は、保護カバー部を形成する裏パック92と払出ユニット93とがユニット化されている。また、各制御基板には、各制御を司る1チップマイコンとしてのMPU、各種機器との連絡をとるポート、各種抽選の際に用いられる乱数発生器、時間計数や同期を図る場合などに使用されるクロックパルス発生回路等が、必要に応じて搭載されている。 In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

なお、主制御装置110、音声ランプ制御装置113及び表示制御装置114、払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112、電源装置115、カードユニット接続基板116は、それぞれ基板ボックス100〜104に収納されている。基板ボックス100〜104は、ボックスベースと該ボックスベースの開口部を覆うボックスカバーとを備えており、そのボックスベースとボックスカバーとが互いに連結されて、各制御装置や各基板が収納される。 The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

また、基板ボックス100(主制御装置110)及び基板ボックス102(払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112)は、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとを封印ユニット(図示せず)によって開封不能に連結(かしめ構造による連結)している。また、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとの連結部には、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとに亘って封印シール(図示せず)が貼着されている。この封印シールは、脆性な素材で構成されており、基板ボックス100,102を開封するために封印シールを剥がそうとしたり、基板ボックス100,102を無理に開封しようとすると、ボックスベース側とボックスカバー側とに切断される。よって、封印ユニット又は封印シールを確認することで、基板ボックス100,102が開封されたかどうかを知ることができる。 Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

払出ユニット93は、裏パックユニット94の最上部に位置して上方に開口したタンク130と、タンク130の下方に連結され下流側に向けて緩やかに傾斜するタンクレール131と、タンクレール131の下流側に縦向きに連結されるケースレール132と、ケースレール132の最下流部に設けられ、払出モータ216(図4参照)の所定の電気的構成により球の払出を行う払出装置133とを備えている。タンク130には、遊技ホールの島設備から供給される球が逐次補給され、払出装置133により必要個数の球の払い出しが適宜行われる。タンクレール131には、当該タンクレール131に振動を付加するためのバイブレータ134が取り付けられている。 The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

また、払出制御装置111には状態復帰スイッチ120が設けられ、発射制御装置112には可変抵抗器の操作つまみ121が設けられ、電源装置115にはRAM消去スイッチ122が設けられている。状態復帰スイッチ120は、例えば、払出モータ216(図4参照)部の球詰まり等、払出エラーの発生時に球詰まりを解消(正常状態への復帰)するために操作される。操作つまみ121は、発射ソレノイドの発射力を調整するために操作される。RAM消去スイッチ122は、パチンコ機10を初期状態に戻したい場合に電源投入時に操作される。 Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

次に、図4を参照して、本パチンコ機10の電気的構成について説明する。図4は、パチンコ機10の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。 Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

主制御装置110には、演算装置である1チップマイコンとしてのMPU201が搭載されている。MPU201には、該MPU201により実行される各種の制御プログラムや固定値データを記憶したROM202と、そのROM202内に記憶される制御プログラムの実行に際して各種のデータ等を一時的に記憶するためのメモリであるRAM203と、そのほか、割込回路やタイマ回路、データ送受信回路などの各種回路が内蔵されている。主制御装置110では、MPU201によって、大当たり抽選や第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81における表示の設定、第2図柄表示装置における表示結果の抽選といったパチンコ機10の主要な処理を実行する。 The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

なお、払出制御装置111や音声ランプ制御装置113などのサブ制御装置に対して動作を指示するために、主制御装置110から該サブ制御装置へ各種のコマンドがデータ送受信回路によって送信されるが、かかるコマンドは、主制御装置110からサブ制御装置へ一方向にのみ送信される。 In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

RAM203は、各種エリア、カウンタ、フラグのほか、MPU201の内部レジスタの内容やMPU201により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。なお、RAM203は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM203に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。 The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

停電などの発生により電源が遮断されると、その電源遮断時(停電発生時を含む。以下同様)のスタックポインタや、各レジスタの値がRAM203に記憶される。一方、電源投入時(停電解消による電源投入を含む。以下同様)には、RAM203に記憶される情報に基づいて、パチンコ機10の状態が電源遮断前の状態に復帰される。RAM203への書き込みはメイン処理(図示せず)によって電源遮断時に実行され、RAM203に書き込まれた各値の復帰は電源投入時の立ち上げ処理(図示せず)において実行される。なお、MPU201のNMI端子(ノンマスカブル割込端子)には、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、停電監視回路252からの停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU201へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。 When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

主制御装置110のMPU201には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン204を介して入出力ポート205が接続されている。入出力ポート205には、払出制御装置111、音声ランプ制御装置113、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B、第2図柄表示装置、第2図柄保留ランプ、特定入賞口65aの開閉板の下辺を軸として正面側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイドや電動役物を駆動するためのソレノイドなどからなるソレノイド209が接続され、MPU201は、入出力ポート205を介してこれらに対し各種コマンドや制御信号を送信する。 An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

また、入出力ポート205には、図示しないスイッチ群およびスライド位置検出センサSや回転位置検出センサRを含むセンサ群などからなる各種スイッチ208、電源装置115に設けられた後述のRAM消去スイッチ回路253が接続され、MPU201は各種スイッチ208から出力される信号や、RAM消去スイッチ回路253より出力されるRAM消去信号SG2に基づいて各種処理を実行する。 Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

払出制御装置111は、払出モータ216を駆動させて賞球や貸出球の払出制御を行うものである。演算装置であるMPU211は、そのMPU211により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM212と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM213とを有している。 The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

払出制御装置111のRAM213は、主制御装置110のRAM203と同様に、MPU211の内部レジスタの内容やMPU211により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。RAM213は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM213に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。なお、主制御装置110のMPU201と同様、MPU211のNMI端子にも、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に停電監視回路252から停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU211へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。 The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

払出制御装置111のMPU211には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン214を介して入出力ポート215が接続されている。入出力ポート215には、主制御装置110や払出モータ216、発射制御装置112などがそれぞれ接続されている。また、図示はしないが、払出制御装置111には、払い出された賞球を検出するための賞球検出スイッチが接続されている。なお、該賞球検出スイッチは、払出制御装置111に接続されるが、主制御装置110には接続されていない。 An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

発射制御装置112は、主制御装置110により球の発射の指示がなされた場合に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量に応じた球の打ち出し強さとなるよう球発射ユニット112aを制御するものである。球発射ユニット112aは、図示しない発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石を備えており、その発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石は、所定条件が整っている場合に駆動が許可される。具体的には、遊技者が操作ハンドル51に触れていることをタッチセンサ51aにより検出し、球の発射を停止させるための発射停止スイッチ51bがオフ(操作されていないこと)を条件に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)に対応して発射ソレノイドが励磁され、操作ハンドル51の操作量に応じた強さで球が発射される。 The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、音声出力装置(図示しないスピーカなど)226における音声の出力、ランプ表示装置(電飾部29〜33、表示ランプ34など)227における点灯および消灯の出力、変動演出(変動表示)や予告演出といった表示制御装置114で行われる第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様の設定などを制御するものである。演算装置であるMPU221は、そのMPU221により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM222と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM223とを有している。 The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

音声ランプ制御装置113のMPU221には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン224を介して入出力ポート225が接続されている。入出力ポート225には、主制御装置110、表示制御装置114、音声出力装置226、ランプ表示装置227、その他装置228、枠ボタン22などがそれぞれ接続されている。その他装置228には駆動モータ472が含まれる。 An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 472.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、主制御装置110から受信した各種のコマンド(変動パターンコマンド、停止種別コマンド等)に基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様を決定し、決定した表示態様をコマンド(表示用変動パターンコマンド、表示用停止種別コマンド等)によって表示制御装置114へ通知する。また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、枠ボタン22からの入力を監視し、遊技者によって枠ボタン22が操作された場合は、第3図柄表示装置81で表示されるステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチ時の演出内容を変更したりするように、表示制御装置114へ指示する。ステージが変更される場合は、変更後のステージに応じた後面画像を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させるべく、変更後のステージに関する情報を含めた後面画像変更コマンドを表示制御装置114へ送信する。ここで、後面画像とは、第3図柄表示装置81に表示させる主要な画像である第3図柄の後面側に表示される画像のことである。表示制御装置114は、この音声ランプ制御装置113から送信されるコマンドに従って、第3図柄表示装置81に各種の画像を表示する。 The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、表示制御装置114から第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を表すコマンド(表示コマンド)を受信する。音声ランプ制御装置113では、表示制御装置114から受信した表示コマンドに基づき、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容に合わせて、その表示内容に対応する音声を音声出力装置226から出力し、また、その表示内容に対応させてランプ表示装置227の点灯および消灯を制御する。 Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the sound corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs the sound corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

表示制御装置114は、音声ランプ制御装置113及び第3図柄表示装置81が接続され、音声ランプ制御装置113より受信したコマンドに基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81における第3図柄の変動演出などの表示を制御するものである。また、表示制御装置114は、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を通知する表示コマンドを適宜音声ランプ制御装置113へ送信する。音声ランプ制御装置113は、この表示コマンドによって示される表示内容にあわせて音声出力装置226から音声を出力することで、第3図柄表示装置81の表示と音声出力装置226からの音声出力とをあわせることができる。 In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

電源装置115は、パチンコ機10の各部に電源を供給するための電源部251と、停電等による電源遮断を監視する停電監視回路252と、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が設けられたRAM消去スイッチ回路253とを有している。電源部251は、図示しない電源経路を通じて、各制御装置110〜114等に対して各々に必要な動作電圧を供給する装置である。その概要としては、電源部251は、外部より供給される交流24ボルトの電圧を取り込み、各種スイッチ208などの各種スイッチや、ソレノイド209などのソレノイド、モータ等を駆動するための12ボルトの電圧、ロジック用の5ボルトの電圧、RAMバックアップ用のバックアップ電圧などを生成し、これら12ボルトの電圧、5ボルトの電圧及びバックアップ電圧を各制御装置110〜114等に対して必要な電圧を供給する。 The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

停電監視回路252は、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、主制御装置110のMPU201及び払出制御装置111のMPU211の各NMI端子へ停電信号SG1を出力するための回路である。停電監視回路252は、電源部251から出力される最大電圧である直流安定24ボルトの電圧を監視し、この電圧が22ボルト未満になった場合に停電(電源断、電源遮断)の発生と判断して、停電信号SG1を主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111へ出力する。停電信号SG1の出力によって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、停電の発生を認識し、NMI割込処理を実行する。なお、電源部251は、直流安定24ボルトの電圧が22ボルト未満になった後においても、NMI割込処理の実行に充分な時間の間、制御系の駆動電圧である5ボルトの電圧の出力を正常値に維持するように構成されている。よって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、NMI割込処理(図示せず)を正常に実行し完了することができる。 The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

RAM消去スイッチ回路253は、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が押下された場合に、主制御装置110へ、バックアップデータをクリアさせるためのRAM消去信号SG2を出力するための回路である。主制御装置110は、パチンコ機10の電源投入時に、RAM消去信号SG2を入力した場合に、バックアップデータをクリアすると共に、払出制御装置111においてバックアップデータをクリアさせるための払出初期化コマンドを払出制御装置111に対して送信する。 The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

次いで、図5から図26を参照して、動作ユニット200について説明する。まず、図5から図7を参照して、背面ケース210への各ユニット300及び400の収容構造について説明する。 Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 26. First, the storage structure of the units 300 and 400 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

図5は、動作ユニット200の正面斜視図であり、図6及び図7は、分解した動作ユニット200を正面視した動作ユニット200の分解正面斜視図である。なお、図7では、複合動作ユニット400が背面ケース210に装着された状態が図示される。 FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 when the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the combined operation unit 400 is mounted on the rear case 210.

図5から図7に示すように、動作ユニット200は、底壁部211と、その底壁部211の外縁から立設される外壁部212とから一面側(図6紙面手前側)が開放された箱状に形成される背面ケース210を備える。背面ケース210は、その底壁部211の中央に矩形状の開口211aが開口形成されることで、正面視矩形の枠状に形成される。開口211aは、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)の外形に対応した(即ち、第3図柄表示装置81を配設可能な)大きさに形成される。 As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

動作ユニット200は、背面ケース210の内部空間に、正面ユニット300及び複合動作ユニット400がそれぞれ収容され、これを1ユニットとして構成される。 In the operation unit 200, the front unit 300 and the combined operation unit 400 are respectively housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, and these are configured as one unit.

具体的には、複合動作ユニット400は、背面ケース210の外壁部212の内側面が形成する形状よりも若干小さな外形で形成され、外壁部212の内側面に当接しながら、外壁部212に囲われる態様で底壁部211に配設される(図7参照)。複合動作ユニット400は、組立状態(図5参照)において、正面視で背面ケース210の開口211aと一致する位置に矩形状の開口が形成される。 Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and is surrounded by the outer wall portion 212 while abutting on the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 in such an manner (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the composite operation unit 400 has a rectangular opening formed at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

この図7に示す状態に対し、正面ユニット300は、複合動作ユニット400の正面側に、重ね合わされた積層状態で配設され、背面ケース210に収容される(図5参照)。 In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the front unit 300 is arranged on the front side of the composite operation unit 400 in a laminated state, and is housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

このように、本実施形態では、所定の動作ユニット(例えば、複合動作ユニット400)に対し、他の動作ユニット(例えば、正面ユニット300)が正面側に重ね合わされた積層状態で配設されるので、正面視において、所定の動作ユニットを、他の動作ユニットによって遮蔽することができる。 As described above, in the present embodiment, the other operating units (for example, the front unit 300) are arranged in a laminated state in which the other operating units (for example, the front unit 300) are superposed on the front side with respect to the predetermined operating unit (for example, the composite operating unit 400). In front view, a predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit.

言い換えれば、遊技盤13(図2参照)が光透過性材料から形成され、その遊技盤13の背面側に配設される動作ユニットを遊技者が視認可能とされる場合に、所定の動作ユニットの必要な部分のみを遊技者に視認させ、他の部分を他の動作ユニットにより遊技者から遮蔽することができる。これにより、他の動作ユニットによって遮蔽される所定の演出部材については、その全体が遊技者から視認されることを前提として設計する必要がないので、その設計の自由度の向上を図ることができる。 In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

次いで、図8を参照して、複合動作ユニット400の動作態様の概略について説明する。なお、図8の説明においては、図5から図7を適宜参照する。 Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the outline of the operation mode of the composite operation unit 400 will be described. In the description of FIG. 8, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

図8は、動作ユニット200の正面図である。なお、図8では、複合動作ユニット400の一対のスライド部材420が張出位置に配置された状態が図示される。 FIG. 8 is a front view of the operating unit 200. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

図5に示す退避位置では、複合動作ユニット400の一対のスライド部材420は、背面ケース210の開口211aの上方および下方に退避され、遊技者から視認不能とされる(図2参照)。一方、図8に示す張出位置では、一対のスライド部材420が互いに対向する向きにスライド移動され、一対のスライド部材420が背面ケース210の開口211aの中央(即ち、第3図柄表示装置81の正面、図2参照)に配置される。 At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of slide members 420 are slid and moved in directions facing each other, and the pair of slide members 420 are moved to the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is placed on the front (see FIG. 2).

これら各動作ユニット300及び400は、それぞれ独立して動作可能に形成されると共に、上述したように、重ね合わされた(積層された)状態で配設されるので、各動作ユニット300及び400のうちの層を違えて配設されるものについては、例え動作部材が背面ケース210の開口211aの内方に張り出す態様のものであっても同時に動作させることができる。即ち、各動作ユニット300及び400をそれぞれ単体で動作させるだけでなく、これらの動作を組み合わせることができるので、その演出効果を高めることができる。 Each of these operating units 300 and 400 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and is arranged in a stacked state as described above. Therefore, among the operating units 300 and 400, the operating units 300 and 400 are arranged in a stacked state. With respect to those arranged in different layers, even if the operating member projects inward of the opening 211a of the back case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, not only can each of the operation units 300 and 400 be operated individually, but these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

なお、複合動作ユニット400は、一対のスライド部材420の退避位置および張出位置が、一対のスライド部材420の可動範囲の終端として形成される。 In the composite operation unit 400, the retracted position and the overhanging position of the pair of slide members 420 are formed as the end of the movable range of the pair of slide members 420.

次いで、図9から図24を参照して、複合動作ユニット400について説明する。図9(a)及び図9(b)は、複合動作ユニット400の正面斜視図である。なお、図9(a)では、スライド部材420及び半月部材460が退避位置に配置され、図9(b)では、スライド部材420及び半月部材460が張出位置に配置された状態が図示される。なお、スライド部材420及び半月部材460の張出位置は、スライド部材420の可動範囲の終端のうち上述した退避位置の反対側に位置する終端として形成される。 Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. 9 (a) and 9 (b) are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 9A shows a state in which the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 9B shows a state in which the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged in the overhanging position. .. The overhanging positions of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are formed as terminals located on the opposite side of the above-mentioned retracted position among the ends of the movable range of the slide member 420.

図9に示すように、複合動作ユニット400の一対のスライド部材420は、上下方向にスライド移動され、そのスライド移動の過程で、半月部材460がスライド部材420の軸支孔421a(図12参照)を中心に回転される。次に、複合動作ユニット400の全体構成について説明する。 As shown in FIG. 9, the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are slid in the vertical direction, and in the process of the slide movement, the half-moon member 460 is moved to the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 12). Is rotated around. Next, the overall configuration of the composite operation unit 400 will be described.

図10は、複合動作ユニット400の分解正面斜視図であり、図11は、複合動作ユニット400の分解背面斜視図であり、図12は、一対のスライド部材420、背面カバー430、第1ギア群440及び第2ギア群450の正面分解斜視図であり、図13は、一対のスライド部材420、背面カバー430、第1ギア群440及び第2ギア群450の背面分解斜視図である。 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, and a first gear group. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the 440 and the second gear group 450, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the pair of slide members 420, the back cover 430, the first gear group 440, and the second gear group 450.

図10から図13に示すように、複合動作ユニット400は、左右一対で配設されると共に背面ケース210に締結固定される一対のベース部材410と、それらのベース部材410を連結すると共に上下方向にスライド移動可能に形成される一対のスライド部材420と、それらのスライド部材420の本体部421の背面に締結されることで本体部421との間に空間を形成する背面カバー430と、スライド部材420と背面カバー430との間に配設される第1ギア群440と、同じくスライド部材420と背面カバー430との間に配設される第2ギア群450と、第2ギア群450の反転ギア453に係止される半月部材460と、スライド部材420を移動させる駆動力を発生させる駆動装置470と、を主に備えて構成される。 As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the composite operation units 400 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and are connected to a pair of base members 410 that are fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and the base members 410 are connected and vertically. A pair of slide members 420 that are slidably movable, a back cover 430 that forms a space between the slide members 420 and the main body 421 by being fastened to the back surface of the main body 421 of the slide members 420, and a slide member. The first gear group 440 arranged between the 420 and the back cover 430, the second gear group 450 also arranged between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430, and the reversal of the second gear group 450. It is mainly composed of a half-moon member 460 locked to the gear 453 and a driving device 470 for generating a driving force for moving the slide member 420.

ベース部材410は、上下方向に長尺の矩形板形状に形成されると共に複合動作ユニット400の骨格となる部材であって、厚み方向を前後方向と一致させる長尺板形状の本体部411と、厚み方向に穿設され上下方向に延びる複数のスライド孔412と、そのスライド孔412の延設方向と平行な壁面として一対のベース部材410の対向する面に形成される位置合わせ壁413と、組立状態(図9参照)においてその位置合わせ壁413に当接される側面の反対側の側面にラックギア414a,414bが形成される固定ラックギア部材414と、を備える。 The base member 410 is a member that is formed in the shape of a long rectangular plate in the vertical direction and serves as a skeleton of the composite operation unit 400, and has a long plate-shaped main body portion 411 that matches the thickness direction with the front-rear direction. Assembled with a plurality of slide holes 412 drilled in the thickness direction and extending in the vertical direction, and an alignment wall 413 formed on opposite surfaces of a pair of base members 410 as a wall surface parallel to the extending direction of the slide holes 412. A fixed rack gear member 414 in which rack gears 414a and 414b are formed on a side surface opposite to the side surface abutting on the alignment wall 413 in the state (see FIG. 9) is provided.

スライド孔412は、スライド部材420のスライド方向を規制する長孔であって、各ベース部材410の略中央に連設されると共に延設方向が一致される一対の中間スライド孔412aと、その中間スライド孔412aの外方(一対のベース部材410が対向する側の反対側)に形成される外方スライド孔412bと、中間スライド孔412aの内方(一対のベース部材410の対向側)に形成される内方スライド孔412cと、を備える。なお、外方スライド孔412bと内方スライド孔412cとは上下互い違いに形成される。即ち、例えば、外方スライド孔412bがベース部材410の上部に形成される場合には、内方スライド孔412cはベース部材410の下部に形成される。 The slide hole 412 is an elongated hole that regulates the slide direction of the slide member 420, and is a pair of intermediate slide holes 412a that are continuously provided at substantially the center of each base member 410 and have the same extension direction, and an intermediate portion thereof. Formed on the outer side of the slide hole 412a (opposite side of the pair of base members 410) and on the inner side of the intermediate slide hole 412a (opposite side of the pair of base members 410). It is provided with an inner slide hole 412c to be formed. The outer slide holes 412b and the inner slide holes 412c are formed alternately in the upper and lower directions. That is, for example, when the outer slide hole 412b is formed in the upper part of the base member 410, the inner slide hole 412c is formed in the lower part of the base member 410.

固定ラックギア部材414は、第1ギア群440及び第2ギア群450に駆動力を伝達する目的で位置合わせ壁413に当接された状態でベース部材410に締結されると共に断面矩形の棒形状に形成される部材であって、位置合わせ壁413に当接される側面である外側面と、その外側面と平行に形成される外側面の反対側の面に亘って刻設される常設ラックギア414aと、その常設ラックギア414aの正面側(図10手前側)に隣接して刻設されるラックギアであってベース部材410の中央部付近にのみ刻設される限定ラックギア414bと、を主に備える。 The fixed rack gear member 414 is fastened to the base member 410 in a state of being in contact with the alignment wall 413 for the purpose of transmitting a driving force to the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450, and has a rod shape having a rectangular cross section. Permanent rack gear 414a, which is a member to be formed and is engraved over an outer surface which is a side surface abutting on the alignment wall 413 and a surface opposite to the outer surface formed parallel to the outer surface. A rack gear 414b, which is a rack gear engraved adjacent to the front side (front side in FIG. 10) of the permanent rack gear 414a and is engraved only in the vicinity of the central portion of the base member 410, is mainly provided.

なお、常設ラックギア414aは、第2ギア群450に歯合され、限定ラックギア414bは、第1ギア群440に歯合されるが、詳細は後述する。また、限定ラックギア414bは第1ギア群440の異形ギア441と歯合し始める側に配置される始動ギア歯414b1(端のギア歯)が、その他のギア歯に比較して大型に形成される(図10参照)。 The permanent rack gear 414a is meshed with the second gear group 450, and the limited rack gear 414b is meshed with the first gear group 440, but the details will be described later. Further, in the limited rack gear 414b, the starting gear teeth 414b1 (end gear teeth) arranged on the side where the irregular gears 441 of the first gear group 440 start to mesh with each other are formed larger than the other gear teeth. (See FIG. 10).

スライド部材420は、中央部分に半月部材460が配設されると共に上下スライドされる部材である。なお、スライド部材420は上下一対で形成され、各スライド部材420の構成は共通(正面視における中心点で点対称)なので、一方(上側)のスライド部材420のみ説明し、他方(下側)のスライド部材420の説明を省略する。 The slide member 420 is a member in which the half moon member 460 is arranged in the central portion and slides up and down. Since the slide members 420 are formed as a pair of upper and lower slide members and each slide member 420 has a common configuration (point symmetry at the center point in the front view), only one (upper side) slide member 420 will be described, and the other (lower side) slide member 420 will be described. The description of the slide member 420 will be omitted.

即ち、一方のスライド部材420は、左右方向に長尺の矩形板状に形成されると共に両端部において正面側へ段が形成される本体部421と、その本体部421の両端部から鉛直下方に延設される一対の被伝達脚部422と、本体部421の上下両端から背面側(図11手前側)へ板状に延設される一対の側壁部423と、本体部421の背面から突設されると共に複数が左右方向に連設される第1軸支ピン424と、本体部421の一方(図11右方)の端部の背面から複数が突設される第2軸支ピン425と、を主に備える。 That is, one slide member 420 has a main body portion 421 formed in the shape of a long rectangular plate in the left-right direction and a step formed on both ends toward the front side, and vertically downward from both ends of the main body portion 421. A pair of extended leg portions 422 to be transmitted, a pair of side wall portions 423 extending plate-like from both upper and lower ends of the main body portion 421 to the back side (front side in FIG. 11), and a protrusion from the back surface of the main body portion 421. The first shaft support pin 424, which is provided and a plurality of them are continuously provided in the left-right direction, and the second shaft support pin 425, which is provided so as to project from the back surface of one end (right side of FIG. 11) of the main body 421. And mainly prepare.

本体部421は、中央部に穿設される大径の軸支孔421aと、その軸支孔421aと同軸の円弧状に穿設される回転規制孔421bと、上端の側壁部423と対向配置されると共に中央側が側壁部423に一段近接されるスライド規制壁部421cと、両端部において背面側へ突設されると共に上下一対で形成されるスライド規制ピン421dと、を主に備えて構成される。 The main body portion 421 is arranged so as to face the large-diameter shaft support hole 421a drilled in the central portion, the rotation control hole 421b drilled in an arc shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 421a, and the side wall portion 423 at the upper end. It is mainly composed of a slide regulation wall portion 421c whose central side is one step closer to the side wall portion 423, and a slide regulation pin 421d which is projected toward the back side at both ends and is formed as a pair of upper and lower parts. NS.

軸支孔421aは、半月部材460の円弧状壁部461cが挿通される開口であって、軸支孔421aの直径は円弧状壁部461cの外径よりも若干大きな直径で形成される。この軸支孔421aを通して半月部材460と反転ギア453とが相対回転不能に連結される。 The shaft support hole 421a is an opening through which the arc-shaped wall portion 461c of the half-moon member 460 is inserted, and the diameter of the shaft support hole 421a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the arc-shaped wall portion 461c. Through this shaft support hole 421a, the half moon member 460 and the reversing gear 453 are connected so as not to rotate relative to each other.

回転規制孔421bは、半月部材460の係止ピン461eが挿通される開口であって、回転規制孔421bの幅は係止ピン461eの直径よりも若干大きな幅で形成される。回転規制孔421bの端部に係止ピン461eが当接されることで半月部材460のそれ以上の回転が規制される。 The rotation control hole 421b is an opening through which the locking pin 461e of the half-moon member 460 is inserted, and the width of the rotation control hole 421b is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the locking pin 461e. Further rotation of the half-moon member 460 is restricted by abutting the locking pin 461e on the end of the rotation restricting hole 421b.

スライド規制壁部421cは、本体部421の上側の側壁部423との間に第1ギア群440のスライドラック442を収容する部分であって、段に形成される部分がスライドラック442に付勢力を与える付勢バネ442cの一端をせき止める態様で形成される。 The slide regulation wall portion 421c is a portion for accommodating the slide rack 442 of the first gear group 440 between the slide restricting wall portion 421c and the upper side wall portion 423 of the main body portion 421, and the portion formed in the steps urges the slide rack 442. It is formed in a manner of damming one end of the urging spring 442c.

スライド規制ピン421dは、リング状のカラー部材Cに挿入されると共にベース部材410の中間スライド孔412aに挿通される筒状の部材であって、先端において抜け止め板Bが締結固定される。 The slide regulation pin 421d is a tubular member that is inserted into the ring-shaped collar member C and is inserted into the intermediate slide hole 412a of the base member 410, and the retaining plate B is fastened and fixed at the tip.

カラー部材C(図17(a)参照)は、フランジ(大径部)を有するリング状に形成される。フランジの外径は中間スライド孔412aを含む各スライド孔412a〜412cの幅よりも大径に形成され、フランジの形成されるリング部分の外径は中間スライド孔412aを含む各スライド孔412a〜412cの幅よりも若干小さく形成される。そのため、フランジがスライド部材420の本体部421とベース部材410の本体部411との間に介在すると共に、カラー部材Cのリング部分が中間スライド孔412aに若干の隙間を空けて収容される。これにより、スライド規制ピン421dは、中間スライド孔412aの延設方向に自由に移動可能に形成される一方、中間スライド孔412aの延設方向と直交する方向への移動を規制される。 The collar member C (see FIG. 17A) is formed in a ring shape having a flange (large diameter portion). The outer diameter of the flange is formed to be larger than the width of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a, and the outer diameter of the ring portion on which the flange is formed is the outer diameter of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. It is formed slightly smaller than the width of. Therefore, the flange is interposed between the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 and the main body portion 411 of the base member 410, and the ring portion of the collar member C is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a with a slight gap. As a result, the slide regulation pin 421d is formed so as to be freely movable in the extending direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a, while the movement of the intermediate slide hole 412a in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction is restricted.

抜け止め板B(図19(a)参照)は、本体部が中間スライド孔412aを含む各スライド孔412a〜412cの幅よりも大きな幅で形成される。そのため、抜け止め板Bがスライド規制ピン421dに締結された状態において、スライド部材420はベース部材410と引き抜き不能に連結される。 The retaining plate B (see FIG. 19A) has a main body having a width larger than the width of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. Therefore, the slide member 420 is non-pullably connected to the base member 410 in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide regulation pin 421d.

また、抜け止め板Bは、スライド規制ピン421dの端部に当接する面に締結孔が穿設されると共にその締結孔の周りがカラー部材Cのリング部分と同形に肉盛りされる。その肉盛り部分は、中間スライド孔412aに収容される。これにより、スライド規制ピン421dの根本部分にはカラー部材Cが配設されると共に先端部分には抜け止め板Bの肉盛り部分が配設されるので、スライド規制ピン421dの軸を中間スライド孔412aを含む各スライド孔412a〜412cの開口方向に一致させながら安定して支持することができる(図19(a)参照)。 Further, the retaining plate B is provided with a fastening hole on the surface abutting the end portion of the slide regulation pin 421d, and the circumference of the fastening hole is built up in the same shape as the ring portion of the collar member C. The built-up portion is housed in the intermediate slide hole 412a. As a result, the collar member C is disposed at the root portion of the slide regulation pin 421d, and the build-up portion of the retaining plate B is disposed at the tip portion. It can be stably supported while matching the opening directions of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the 412a (see FIG. 19A).

被伝達脚部422は、駆動装置470の駆動力が伝達される部分であって、駆動装置470の駆動ギア473に歯合されるラックギア422aと、本体部421のスライド規制ピン421dと同じ態様で突設されるスライド規制ピン422bと、ラックギア422aの前側の歯幅方向(ギア歯の連設方向に垂直な方向)側面に覆設される前側壁部422cと、その前側壁部422cに形成される円弧状の切り欠きである切り欠き部422dと、を主に備える。 The transmitted leg portion 422 is a portion to which the driving force of the driving device 470 is transmitted, and has the same embodiment as the rack gear 422a meshed with the driving gear 473 of the driving device 470 and the slide restricting pin 421d of the main body portion 421. It is formed on the slide regulation pin 422b that is projected, the front side wall portion 422c that is overlaid on the side surface in the tooth width direction (direction perpendicular to the continuous direction of the gear teeth) on the front side of the rack gear 422a, and the front side wall portion 422c thereof. It mainly includes a notch portion 422d, which is an arc-shaped notch.

スライド規制ピン422bは、スライド規制ピン421dと同様にカラー部材C及び抜け止め板Bが配設され、ベース部材410の各スライド孔412b,412cに挿通される。本実施形態では、正面視右方の被伝達脚部422のスライド規制ピン422bがベース部材410の外方スライド孔412cに挿通されると共に、正面視左方の被伝達脚部422のスライド規制ピン422bがベース部材410の内方スライド孔412cに挿通される。これにより、抜け止め板Bがスライド規制ピン422bに締結された状態において、スライド規制ピン422bの軸を各スライド孔412b,412cの開口方向に一致させながら安定して支持すると共にスライド部材420及びベース部材410を引き抜き不能に連結することができる。 Similar to the slide regulation pin 421d, the slide regulation pin 422b is provided with the collar member C and the retaining plate B, and is inserted into the slide holes 412b and 412c of the base member 410. In the present embodiment, the slide regulation pin 422b of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the right side of the front view is inserted into the outer slide hole 412c of the base member 410, and the slide regulation pin 422 of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the left side of the front view is inserted. 422b is inserted into the inward slide hole 412c of the base member 410. As a result, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide regulation pin 422b, the axis of the slide regulation pin 422b is stably supported while being aligned with the opening directions of the slide holes 412b and 412c, and the slide member 420 and the base. The member 410 can be connected so that it cannot be pulled out.

前側壁部422cは、組立状態(図18参照)の正面視において、駆動ギア473のギア歯と重なり可能な態様で形成される。 The front side wall portion 422c is formed so as to be able to overlap with the gear teeth of the drive gear 473 in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 18).

切り欠き部422dは、一対のスライド部材420が退避位置(図9(a)参照)に配置された状態において、駆動ギア473の歯先円より若干大きな代表円が駆動ギアの回転軸と中心軸を合わせて配置された場合に、正面視でその代表円が前側壁部422cに投影される部分に形成される。 In the cutout portion 422d, when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 9A), the representative circle slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473 is the rotation axis and the central axis of the drive gear. When they are arranged together, the representative circle is formed in the portion projected on the front side wall portion 422c in the front view.

側壁部423は、本体部421の軸支孔421aの穿設される領域の上下において切り欠かれる切り欠き部423aを備える。切り欠き部423aは、半月部材460の駆動レバー467が通過する部分としての役割を有する。 The side wall portion 423 includes a notch portion 423a that is cut out above and below the region where the shaft support hole 421a of the main body portion 421 is formed. The cutout portion 423a serves as a portion through which the drive lever 467 of the half-moon member 460 passes.

第1軸支ピン424は、スライド部材420の背面から複数(本実施形態では3箇所)が連設される嵩上げ軸支ピン424aと、スライド部材420の軸支孔421aに隣接される二層ギア軸支ピン424bと、を主に備える。 The first shaft support pin 424 includes a raised shaft support pin 424a in which a plurality of (three locations in the present embodiment) are continuously provided from the back surface of the slide member 420, and a two-layer gear adjacent to the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420. Mainly includes a shaft support pin 424b.

嵩上げ軸支ピン424aは、周囲に同一高さのリング状部を備えるため、挿通される第2ギア群450がスライド部材420の本体部421から嵩上げされて(本体部421から所定距離空けて)軸支される。これにより、その空間に第1ギア群440を配設することができる。 Since the raised shaft support pin 424a is provided with a ring-shaped portion having the same height around it, the second gear group 450 to be inserted is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). Axial support. Thereby, the first gear group 440 can be arranged in the space.

背面カバー430は、スライド部材420の背面に締結固定されることでスライド部材420の本体部421及び一対の側壁部423に蓋をする部材であって、スライド規制ピン421dが挿通される一対の挿通孔430aがそれぞれ一方の端部に穿設される。 The back cover 430 is a member that covers the main body portion 421 and the pair of side wall portions 423 of the slide member 420 by being fastened and fixed to the back surface of the slide member 420, and is a pair of insertion through which the slide regulation pin 421d is inserted. Holes 430a are bored at one end of each.

第1ギア群440は、スライド部材420及び背面カバー430の間に収容されると共に限定ラックギア414bに歯合されるギア群であって、限定ラックギア414bに歯合される異形ギア441と、側面にラックギア442bが刻設されると共にスライド部材420のスライド規制壁部421cに沿ってスライド移動されるスライドラック442と、異形ギア441の回転をスライドラック442に伝達させる一対の伝達ギア443と、異形ギア441及び一対の伝達ギア443のうち異形ギア441側に配設される伝達ギア443に軸方向から蓋をする板状部材であってスライド部材420の本体部421に締結固定される中間板444と、を主に備える。 The first gear group 440 is a group of gears housed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430 and meshed with the limited rack gear 414b, and has a deformed gear 441 meshed with the limited rack gear 414b and a side surface. A slide rack 442 on which the rack gear 442b is engraved and slid along the slide regulation wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, a pair of transmission gears 443 that transmit the rotation of the deformed gear 441 to the slide rack 442, and a deformed gear. Of the 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443, the intermediate plate 444 which is a plate-shaped member that covers the transmission gear 443 arranged on the deformed gear 441 side from the axial direction and is fastened and fixed to the main body 421 of the slide member 420. , Is mainly provided.

異形ギア441は、刻設されるギア歯のうち、他の歯に比較して大型に形成される始動ギア歯441aを備える。 The modified gear 441 includes a starting gear tooth 441a that is formed to be larger than the other teeth among the gear teeth to be engraved.

異形ギア441及び一対の伝達ギア443は、それぞれスライド部材420の複数の第2軸支ピン425に軸支される。 The modified gear 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are pivotally supported by a plurality of second shaft support pins 425 of the slide member 420, respectively.

スライドラック442は、矩形棒形状に形成される本体部442aと、その本体部442aの一方の側面に形成されると共に伝達ギア443に歯合されるラックギア442bと、本体部442aの側面から突設される突部に係止される付勢バネ442cと、を主に備える。 The slide rack 442 is formed from the side surface of the main body portion 442a formed in a rectangular rod shape, the rack gear 442b formed on one side surface of the main body portion 442a and meshed with the transmission gear 443, and the main body portion 442a. It mainly includes an urging spring 442c that is locked to the protruding portion.

付勢バネ442cは、スライド部材420のスライド規制壁部421cの段部に係止されることで、スライドラック442を伝達ギア443側へ押し戻す付勢力を発生させる。 The urging spring 442c is locked to the step portion of the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420 to generate an urging force that pushes the slide rack 442 back toward the transmission gear 443.

中間板444は、第1ギア群440と第2ギア群450とを前後に区分けする板であって、正面側へ軸支ピン444aが突設される。 The intermediate plate 444 is a plate that divides the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 into front and rear, and a shaft support pin 444a is projected toward the front side.

軸支ピン444aには、第2ギア群450の複数のギアのうち、ベース部材410の常設ラックギア414aに歯合される伝達ギア451が軸支される。 Of the plurality of gears of the second gear group 450, the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a.

第2ギア群450は、スライド部材420の上下方向の変位を利用して反転ギア453を回転させることで半月部材460を反転させる役割を有し、左右方向に複数個(本実施形態では4個)が連設されると共に外端部のギアがベース部材410の常設ラックギア414aに歯合される複数の伝達ギア451と、その複数の伝達ギア451のうち常設ラックギア414aの反対側の内端部に軸支される伝達ギア451に上層(背面側の層)のギア歯452aが歯合される二層ギア452と、その二層ギア452の下層(正面側の層)の分断ギア歯452bに歯合される反転ギア453と、を主に備える。 The second gear group 450 has a role of reversing the half-moon member 460 by rotating the reversing gear 453 by utilizing the vertical displacement of the slide member 420, and a plurality of the second gear group 450 in the left-right direction (four in the present embodiment). ) Are connected and the gear at the outer end is meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410, and the inner end of the plurality of transmission gears 451 on the opposite side of the permanent rack gear 414a. The two-layer gear 452 in which the gear teeth 452a of the upper layer (rear layer) are meshed with the transmission gear 451 axially supported by the two-layer gear 452, and the dividing gear teeth 452b of the lower layer (front layer) of the two-layer gear 452. It mainly includes a reversing gear 453 to be meshed with each other.

伝達ギア451は、複数のギアのうち、ベース部材410の常設ラックギア414a側の端のギアは第1ギア群440の軸支ピン444aに軸支され、その他のギアはスライド部材420の嵩上げ軸支ピン424aに軸支される。 Of the plurality of gears, the transmission gear 451 is pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a of the first gear group 440, and the other gears are the raised shaft support of the slide member 420. It is pivotally supported by the pin 424a.

上述したように、嵩上げ軸支ピン424aは、周囲に同一高さのリング状部を備えるため、伝達ギア451はスライド部材420の本体部421から嵩上げされて(本体部421から所定距離空けて)軸支される。これにより、第1ギア群440の軸支ピン444aに軸支される伝達ギア451と、その他の伝達ギア451との軸方向高さを一致させることができる。即ち、複数の伝達ギア451は、スライド部材420の本体部421から所定距離空けた状態で互いに軸支される。 As described above, since the raised shaft support pin 424a is provided with a ring-shaped portion having the same height around it, the transmission gear 451 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). Axial support. As a result, the axial heights of the transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a of the first gear group 440 and the other transmission gears 451 can be made to match. That is, the plurality of transmission gears 451 are pivotally supported by each other with a predetermined distance from the main body 421 of the slide member 420.

二層ギア452は、樹脂材料から形成され、上層(背面側の層)に刻設されるギア歯452aと、下層(正面側の層)に刻設される分断ギア歯452bと、上層と下層との間に形成される円板部452cと、反転ギア453の円弧状凹部453cに摺動される円弧状の壁面である摺動壁部452dと、を主に備える(図20参照)。 The two-layer gear 452 is formed of a resin material and has a gear tooth 452a engraved on the upper layer (back surface side layer), a dividing gear tooth 452b engraved on the lower layer (front side layer), and an upper layer and a lower layer. Mainly includes a disk portion 452c formed between the two, and a sliding wall portion 452d which is an arc-shaped wall surface slid on the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 20).

ギア歯452aは、伝達ギア451と常時歯合されるため、スライド部材420が上下にスライド移動すると二層ギア452は常時回転される。 Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451, the two-layer gear 452 is constantly rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down.

二層ギア452の下層は、分断ギア歯452bが刻設される領域と摺動壁部452dが形成される領域とで構成され、分断ギア歯452b及び摺動壁部452dの境界に他の中間ギア歯452b2よりも大型の始動ギア歯452b1が刻設される。なお、ギア歯の受け入れ部分として始動ギア歯452b1の両側に形成される窪み部452b3,452b4(図20参照)は、中間ギア歯452b2のギア歯間の窪みに比較して深く形成される。これにより、後述する反転ギア453の中間ギア歯453b2より大型に形成される始動ギア歯453b1を噛み合い良好(ギア歯が深く噛み合う状態)に受け入れることができる。従って、ギア歯の大きさが歯ごとに異なる場合でも、二層ギア452と反転ギア453との歯合関係を良好に保つことができる。 The lower layer of the two-layer gear 452 is composed of a region in which the dividing gear tooth 452b is engraved and a region in which the sliding wall portion 452d is formed. A starting gear tooth 452b1 larger than the gear tooth 452b2 is engraved. The recesses 452b3 and 452b4 (see FIG. 20) formed on both sides of the starting gear teeth 452b1 as receiving portions of the gear teeth are formed deeper than the recesses between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, the starting gear teeth 453b1 formed to be larger than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453, which will be described later, can be accepted in good meshing (a state in which the gear teeth are deeply meshed). Therefore, even if the size of the gear teeth is different for each tooth, the toothing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 can be kept good.

始動ギア歯452b1の両側に形成される窪み部452b3,452b4は、反転ギア453の始動ギア歯453b1の受け入れ部分として働く(図23(b)参照)。なお、窪み部452b3,452b4のうち、摺動壁部452dに近接される側を第1窪み部452b3とし、その第1窪み部452b3の反対側を第2窪み部452b4とする。 The recesses 452b3 and 452b4 formed on both sides of the starting gear tooth 452b1 serve as a receiving portion of the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B). Of the recessed portions 452b3 and 452b4, the side close to the sliding wall portion 452d is referred to as the first recessed portion 452b3, and the opposite side of the first recessed portion 452b3 is referred to as the second recessed portion 452b4.

ギア歯452bは、分断ギア歯452bの始動ギア歯452b1より小型に形成されると共に中間ギア歯452b2より大型に形成される。これにより、後述するように、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と反転ギア453の始動ギア歯453b1との歯合開始時の歯合ずれを抑制すると共に歯合継続時の回転の精度を向上させることができる。 The gear tooth 452b is formed smaller than the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the dividing gear tooth 452b and larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, as will be described later, the misalignment between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 at the start of meshing is suppressed, and the accuracy of rotation during continuous meshing is improved. Can be made to.

なお、歯合開始時とは、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と、反転ギア453とが当接し始める時を意味し、ギア歯同士が当接され始める場合に限るものではない。本実施形態では、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と、反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dとが当接される時を意味する。 The start of meshing means the time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to come into contact with each other, and is not limited to the case where the gear teeth start to come into contact with each other. In the present embodiment, it means that the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 are in contact with each other.

また、歯合継続時とは、始動ギア歯452b1,453b1が歯合した後で中間ギア歯452b2,453b2が歯合される状態を意味する。 Further, the continuous meshing means a state in which the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2 are meshed after the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are meshed.

始動ギア歯452b1を大型にする方法としては、歯幅(歯車の軸方向に沿った長さ)を大型にする方法も考えられる。しかし、本実施形態では、二層ギア452を二層構造にしやすいという理由から、始動ギア歯452b1と中間ギア歯452b2との歯幅を同一に形成し、歯厚(歯の連設方向の寸法)及び歯たけを大きくしている。 As a method of enlarging the starting gear tooth 452b1, a method of enlarging the tooth width (the length along the axial direction of the gear) is also conceivable. However, in the present embodiment, the tooth widths of the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed to be the same because the two-layer gear 452 can be easily formed into a two-layer structure, and the tooth thickness (dimensions in the continuous direction of the teeth) is formed. ) And the teeth are enlarged.

円板部452cは、二層ギア452に隣接する伝達ギア451のギア歯や二層ギア452に隣接する反転ギア453のギア歯に軸方向視において重ね合わされて形成される(図21(b)参照)。これにより、伝達ギア451や反転ギア453が軸方向に動いた場合に、それぞれのギア歯が円板部452cに当接されることで、伝達ギア451や反転ギア453がぐらつくことを抑制することができると共に伝達ギア451や反転ギア453のそれ以上の移動を抑制することができる。 The disk portion 452c is formed by being superposed on the gear teeth of the transmission gear 451 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 and the gear teeth of the reversing gear 453 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 in an axial view (FIG. 21B). reference). As a result, when the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 move in the axial direction, the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 are prevented from wobbling due to the respective gear teeth coming into contact with the disk portion 452c. It is possible to suppress further movement of the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453.

反転ギア453は、二層ギア452に歯合され回転されることで半月部材460を反転させる部材であって、半月部材460の筒状本体462aが挿通可能な筒状に形成される本体部453aと、その本体部453aの一方の端部から外方へ向けて形成される反転ギア歯453bと、筒状本体462aの外周に沿った方向で反転ギア歯453bと隣接して形成され本体部453aの軸対象に配置されると共に二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dに摺動される円弧状の壁面である円弧状凹部453cと、その円弧状凹部453cが形成される幅広の突出部である係合突状受け部453dと、本体部453aの外周面を三等分した位置から径方向に突設される係止突部453eと、を主に備える。 The reversing gear 453 is a member that reverses the half-moon member 460 by being meshed with and rotated by the two-layer gear 452, and the main body portion 453a formed into a tubular body through which the tubular main body 462a of the half-moon member 460 can be inserted. And the reversing gear tooth 453b formed outward from one end of the main body portion 453a, and the reversing gear tooth 453b formed adjacent to the reversing gear tooth 453b in the direction along the outer circumference of the tubular main body 462a. An arc-shaped recess 453c, which is an arc-shaped wall surface that is arranged on the axis of the two-layer gear 452 and is slid on the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and a wide protruding portion on which the arc-shaped recess 453c is formed. It mainly includes an engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and a locking protrusion 453e projecting in the radial direction from a position where the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 453a is divided into three equal parts.

反転ギア歯453bは、その両端部に、中間ギア歯453b2(両端部以外のギア歯)よりも(歯厚および歯たけが)大型の始動ギア歯453b1が刻設される。なお、ギア歯の受け入れ部分として始動ギア歯453b1と係合突状受け部453dとの間に形成される窪み部453b3は、中間ギア歯453b2のギア歯間に形成される窪みに比較して深く形成される。これにより、二層ギア452の中間ギア歯452b2より大型に形成される始動ギア歯452b1を噛み合い良好(ギア歯が深く噛み合う状態)に受け入れることができる。従って、ギア歯の大きさが歯ごとに異なる場合でも、二層ギア452と反転ギア453との歯合関係を良好に保つことができる。 The reversing gear teeth 453b are engraved with starting gear teeth 453b1 larger than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 (gear teeth other than both ends) (tooth thickness and tooth injury) at both ends thereof. The recessed portion 453b3 formed between the starting gear tooth 453b1 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d as a receiving portion of the gear tooth is deeper than the recess formed between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear tooth 453b2. It is formed. As a result, the starting gear teeth 452b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 can be accepted in good meshing (a state in which the gear teeth are deeply meshed). Therefore, even if the size of the gear teeth is different for each tooth, the toothing relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 can be kept good.

円弧状凹部453cは、二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dに当接される部分であって、その摺動壁部452dの半径と略同一の曲率半径で形成される。 The arcuate recess 453c is a portion that comes into contact with the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and is formed with a radius of curvature substantially the same as the radius of the sliding wall portion 452d.

係止突部453eは、半月部材460の本体部461に形成される円弧状壁部461cに相対回転不能な態様で嵌合される。これにより、反転ギア453と半月部材460とが一体で回転される。 The locking protrusion 453e is fitted to the arcuate wall portion 461c formed on the main body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460 in such a manner that it cannot rotate relative to each other. As a result, the reversing gear 453 and the half-moon member 460 are integrally rotated.

次いで、図14及び図15を参照して、半月部材460について説明する。図14は、半月部材460の正面斜視図であり、図15は、半月部材460の背面斜視図である。なお、図14及び図15では、半月部材460の本体部461から前カバー466が取り外された状態が図示される。 Next, the half-moon member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the half moon member 460, and FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of the half moon member 460. In addition, in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, a state in which the front cover 466 is removed from the main body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460 is shown.

半月部材460は、スライド部材420(図10参照)の中央に配設されると共にスライド部材420のスライド移動に伴って上下が反転する態様で軸回転される部材であって、半円形状の板部材であって半月部材460の骨格をなす本体部461と、その本体部461の中央付近に穿設される連結孔461aに挿通される筒状本体462aを有する中心ギア462と、その中心ギア462の回転に伴って本体部461に沿ってスライド移動される複数の爪部材463と、その爪部材463の根本に形成されるスライド孔463aに挿通されるスライドピン464bを備えるクランクギア464と、中心ギア462とクランクギア464との間に配設されると共に中心ギア462とクランクギア464とに歯合される伝達ギア群465と、本体部461の正面側から締結固定される前カバー466と、中心ギア462の筒状本体462aの端部に締結固定される駆動レバー467(図12参照)と、を主に備える。 The half-moon member 460 is a member that is arranged in the center of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 10) and is axially rotated in a manner that the slide member 420 is inverted up and down as the slide member 420 slides, and is a semicircular plate. A central gear 462 having a main body 461 which is a member and forms the skeleton of the half-moon member 460, and a tubular main body 462a which is inserted into a connecting hole 461a formed near the center of the main body 461, and a central gear 462 thereof. A plurality of claw members 463 that are slid along the main body 461 with the rotation of the gear, a crank gear 464 having a slide pin 464b that is inserted into a slide hole 463a formed at the base of the claw member 463, and a center. A transmission gear group 465 that is arranged between the gear 462 and the crank gear 464 and meshed with the center gear 462 and the crank gear 464, and a front cover 466 that is fastened and fixed from the front side of the main body 461. It mainly includes a drive lever 467 (see FIG. 12) that is fastened and fixed to the end of the tubular main body 462a of the central gear 462.

本体部461は、中心ギア462が挿通される連結孔461aと、クランクギア464及び伝達ギア群465が軸支される複数の軸支ピン461bと、連結孔461aの周囲に反転ギア453の内周径より若干小さい外径で突設されると共に係止突部453eを嵌め合わせられる切り欠きが形成される円弧状壁部461cと、付勢バネを引っかけられる鉤爪状の鉤部461dと、背面から突設される係止ピン461eと、を主に備える。 The main body 461 has a connecting hole 461a through which the center gear 462 is inserted, a plurality of shaft support pins 461b on which the crank gear 464 and the transmission gear group 465 are pivotally supported, and an inner circumference of the reversing gear 453 around the connecting hole 461a. An arc-shaped wall portion 461c that is projected with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter and has a notch for fitting the locking protrusion 453e, a claw-shaped hook portion 461d on which an urging spring is hooked, and from the back surface. It mainly includes a protruding locking pin 461e.

係止ピン461eは、組立状態(図21(a)参照)でスライド部材420の回転規制孔421bに挿通される。これにより、半月部材460の回転角度が規制される。 The locking pin 461e is inserted into the rotation restricting hole 421b of the slide member 420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21A). As a result, the rotation angle of the half-moon member 460 is regulated.

中心ギア462は、本体部461の連結孔461aに挿通される筒状本体462aと、その筒状本体462aの一方の端部から径方向にフランジ状に形成されるフランジ部462bと、そのフランジ部462bの外周面から径方向内方に刻設されるギア歯462cと、筒状本体462aの一方の端部の反対側の端部である他方の端部に駆動レバー467を締結固定可能に形成される締結孔462dと、一端が本体部461の鉤部461dに係止される付勢バネの他端が引っかけられる鉤爪状の鉤部462eと、を主に備える。 The central gear 462 includes a tubular main body 462a inserted into the connecting hole 461a of the main body 461, a flange portion 462b formed in a radial direction from one end of the tubular main body 462a, and a flange portion thereof. A drive lever 467 can be fastened and fixed to a gear tooth 462c engraved radially inward from the outer peripheral surface of the 462b and a drive lever 467 which is the opposite end of one end of the tubular body 462a. Mainly includes a fastening hole 462d to be formed, and a claw-shaped hook portion 462e to which one end is hooked on the hook portion 461d of the main body portion 461 and the other end of the urging spring is hooked.

爪部材463は、クランクギア464のスライドピン464bが挿通される長孔状のスライド孔463aと、正面側に突設される長尺の板状体であるスライド板部463bと、を主に備える。 The claw member 463 mainly includes an elongated slide hole 463a through which the slide pin 464b of the crank gear 464 is inserted, and a slide plate portion 463b which is a long plate-like body projecting from the front side. ..

スライド板部463bは、前カバー466に穿設される長孔状のスライド孔466aに挿通される。これにより、爪部材463は前カバー466のスライド孔466aの延設方向にスライド移動可能に形成される。 The slide plate portion 463b is inserted into the elongated slide hole 466a formed in the front cover 466. As a result, the claw member 463 is formed so as to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466.

クランクギア464は、本体部461の軸支ピン461bに軸支されると共に外周面にギア歯が刻設される本体部464aと、その本体部464aの回転軸とは偏心して突設されるスライドピン464bと、を主に備える。 The crank gear 464 is a slide that is pivotally supported by a shaft support pin 461b of the main body 461 and has gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 464a and a slide that projects eccentrically from the rotation shaft of the main body 464a. Mainly includes pins 464b.

本体部464aは、中心ギア462及び伝達ギア群465に歯合されることで、中心ギア462の回転に伴って回転される。 The main body portion 464a is meshed with the central gear 462 and the transmission gear group 465, so that the main body portion 464a is rotated with the rotation of the central gear 462.

スライドピン464bは、本体部464aが回転されることで、それぞれの軸支ピン461bを軸にして移動される。それにより、スライドピン464bは、中心ギア462に近接して配置される第1位置(図14参照)と、中心ギア462から遠ざけられて配置される第2位置との間を移動される。このスライドピン464bの移動により、爪部材463が前カバー466のスライド孔466aに沿って移動される(図26(b)参照)。 The slide pin 464b is moved around the respective shaft support pin 461b by rotating the main body portion 464a. As a result, the slide pin 464b is moved between the first position (see FIG. 14) located close to the center gear 462 and the second position located away from the center gear 462. By the movement of the slide pin 464b, the claw member 463 is moved along the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466 (see FIG. 26B).

前カバー466は、本体部461の正面側に締結固定されると共に半月部材460の各部材を本体部461との間に収容する部材であって、爪部材463のスライド板部463bが挿通される長孔状のスライド孔466aが穿設される。 The front cover 466 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body portion 461 and accommodates each member of the half moon member 460 between the main body portion 461, and the slide plate portion 463b of the claw member 463 is inserted through the front cover 466. An elongated slide hole 466a is bored.

駆動レバー467は、径方向外方に延設される長尺板形状のレバー部467a(図13参照)と、中心ギア462の締結孔462dと合致する位置に穿設される挿通孔467b(図13参照)と、を主に備える。 The drive lever 467 is an insertion hole 467b (FIG. 13) formed at a position corresponding to a long plate-shaped lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) extending radially outward and a fastening hole 462d of the central gear 462. 13) and mainly.

レバー部467a(図13参照)は、スライドラック442に押される部分であって、スライドラック442にレバー部467aが押されることで中心ギア462が回転される。 The lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) is a portion pushed by the slide rack 442, and the center gear 462 is rotated by pushing the lever portion 467a by the slide rack 442.

図10から図13に戻って説明する。駆動装置470は、ベース部材410の中央部において正面側へ嵩上げして配設されると共にベース部材410に締結固定される締結板部471と、その締結板部471に締結固定される駆動モータ472と、その駆動モータ472の駆動軸に挿通される駆動ギア473と、を主に備える。 It will be described back to FIG. 10 to FIG. The drive device 470 is arranged so as to be raised to the front side in the central portion of the base member 410, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 with a fastening plate portion 471 and a drive motor 472 fastened and fixed to the fastening plate portion 471. And a drive gear 473 that is inserted into the drive shaft of the drive motor 472.

締結板部471は、駆動ギア472のモータケースの外形に沿って断面円弧状に形成されると共に正面側へ延設される一対の規制壁部471a,471bを備え、一方の規制壁部471a(組立状態において内側)がモータケースの略中間位置まで延設され、他方の規制壁部471b(組立状態において外側)が一方の規制壁部471aの延設端よりも長く延設される。これら一対の規制壁部471a,471bは駆動モータ472を締結板部471から引き抜く際のガイドとして利用される。 The fastening plate portion 471 includes a pair of regulation wall portions 471a and 471b formed in an arc shape in cross section along the outer shape of the motor case of the drive gear 472 and extending to the front side, and one of the regulation wall portions 471a ( The inner side in the assembled state is extended to a substantially intermediate position of the motor case, and the other regulation wall portion 471b (outer side in the assembled state) is extended longer than the extended end of the one regulation wall part 471a. These pair of regulation wall portions 471a and 471b are used as guides when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471.

駆動ギア473は、一対のスライド部材420のラックギア422aに両側から対向配置され、両側から歯合される。 The drive gear 473 is arranged to face the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 from both sides, and is meshed from both sides.

次いで、図16から図19を参照して、複合動作ユニット400の一対のスライド部材420の移動の概要について説明する。図16及び図18は、複合動作ユニット400の部分正面図であり、図17(a)は、図16のXVIIa−XVIIa線における複合動作ユニット400の部分断面図であり、図17(b)は、図17(a)から駆動装置470を移動させた後の複合動作ユニット400の部分断面図であり、図19(a)は、図18のXIXa−XIXa線における複合動作ユニット400の部分断面図であり、図19(b)は、図19(a)から駆動モータ472を駆動ギア473から分離させた後の複合動作ユニット400の部分断面図である。なお、図16及び図17は一対のスライド部材420が退避位置に配置された状態が図示され、図18及び図19は一対のスライド部材420が張出位置に配置された状態が図示される。 Next, the outline of the movement of the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. 16 and 18 are partial front views of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 17 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 in the XVIIa-XVIIa line of FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 after moving the drive device 470 from FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 19 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 in the XIXa-XIXa line of FIG. 19 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 after the drive motor 472 is separated from the drive gear 473 from FIG. 19 (a). Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIGS. 18 and 19 show a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the overhanging position.

図16及び図18に示すように、一対のスライド部材420は、互いの被伝達脚部422同士で駆動装置470の駆動ギア473を挟む。このとき、駆動ギア473を挟んで対向配置される被伝達脚部422のラックギア422aが単一の駆動ギア473と歯合される。これにより、駆動ギア473が駆動モータ472により回転されることで、駆動ギア473を挟んで対向配置される被伝達脚部422が同期してスライド移動される。 As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the pair of slide members 420 sandwich the drive gear 473 of the drive device 470 between the transmitted leg portions 422. At this time, the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 arranged to face each other across the drive gear 473 is meshed with the single drive gear 473. As a result, the drive gear 473 is rotated by the drive motor 472, so that the transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other across the drive gear 473 are slid and moved in synchronization with each other.

即ち、スライド部材420が退避位置(図16参照)に配置された状態において、駆動ギア473が正面視時計回りに回転されることで、上側のスライド部材420は下方へ、下側のスライド部材420は上方へ互いに等速で移動される。このとき、左右に一対で配設される駆動モータ472は同期制御され、一対のスライド部材を安定してスライド移動させることができる。 That is, in the state where the slide member 420 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 is rotated clockwise in the front view, so that the upper slide member 420 moves downward and the lower slide member 420. Are moved upwards at constant speed with each other. At this time, the drive motors 472 arranged in pairs on the left and right are synchronously controlled, and the pair of slide members can be stably slid.

また、一対のスライド部材420のそれぞれの重量が、駆動ギア473に対して相反する方向にかけられる。例えば、正面視右側の駆動ギア473には、上側のスライド部材420からは駆動ギア473を時計回りに回転させる方向へ重量がかけられ、下側のスライド部材420からは駆動ギア473を反時計回りに回転させる方向へ重量がかけられる。これにより、一対のスライド部材420の重量をそれぞれ等しくしておけば、駆動モータ472の動力を切断しても、一対のスライド部材420の重量の釣り合いにより駆動ギア473を停止したままにできる。そのため、一対のスライド部材420を任意の位置に配置した時に駆動モータ472の動力を切断しても、一対のスライド部材420をその位置で停止させたままにすることができる。 Further, the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are applied in opposite directions to the drive gear 473. For example, the drive gear 473 on the right side in the front view is weighted from the upper slide member 420 in the direction of rotating the drive gear 473 clockwise, and the drive gear 473 is counterclockwise from the lower slide member 420. Weight is applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, if the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are made equal to each other, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off, the drive gear 473 can be kept stopped due to the balance of the weights of the pair of slide members 420. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at an arbitrary position, the pair of slide members 420 can be kept stopped at that position.

スライド部材420の一対の被伝達脚部422は、駆動ギア473に同方向から歯合される。即ち、例えば、上側のスライド部材420の左右一対の被伝達脚部422は左右共に正面視右側から駆動ギア473に歯合され、下側のスライド部材420の左右一対の被伝達脚部422は左右共に正面視左側から駆動ギア473に歯合される。 The pair of transmitted legs 422 of the slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the same direction. That is, for example, the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the upper slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the right side in the front view, and the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the lower slide member 420 are left and right. Both are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the left side when viewed from the front.

これにより、駆動ギア473に歯合される一方の被伝達脚部422が突発的に移動しても(例えば歯合される駆動ギア473からの距離が増大する方向へ移動しても)、その一方の被伝達脚部422と本体部421を介して連結されている他方の被伝達脚部422は一方の被伝達脚部422と同方向へ移動される。即ち、歯合される駆動ギア473から遠ざかる方向へ移動されるので、他方の被伝達脚部422に歯合される駆動ギア473に大きな荷重を加えることを抑制することができる。 As a result, even if one of the transmitted legs 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 suddenly moves (for example, even if the distance from the driven gear 473 meshed with the drive gear 473 increases). The other transmitted leg 422 connected via the one transmitted leg 422 and the main body 421 is moved in the same direction as the one transmitted leg 422. That is, since the drive gear 473 is moved away from the driven gear 473 to be meshed with, it is possible to suppress applying a large load to the drive gear 473 meshed with the other leg to be transmitted 422.

ここで、例えば、スライド部材420の一方の被伝達脚部422は駆動ギア473に正面視右側から歯合されると共に他方の被伝達脚部422は駆動ギア473に正面視左側から歯合されると、一方の被伝達脚部422が駆動ギア473から距離が増大する方向へ移動されることで他方の被伝達脚部422が駆動ギア473に押しつけられる。これにより、他方の被伝達脚部422に歯合される駆動ギア473に大きな荷重を加えることになる。 Here, for example, one of the transmitted leg portions 422 of the slide member 420 is meshed with the drive gear 473 from the front right side, and the other transmitted leg portion 422 is meshed with the drive gear 473 from the front view left side. Then, one of the transmitted legs 422 is moved from the drive gear 473 in a direction in which the distance increases, so that the other transmitted leg 422 is pressed against the drive gear 473. As a result, a large load is applied to the drive gear 473 meshed with the other leg to be transmitted 422.

これに対し、本実施形態では、上述したように駆動ギア473に大きな荷重が加えられることを防止することができるので、駆動ギア473と被伝達脚部422のラックギア422aとの歯合関係の適正化を図ることができる。また、一対のスライド部材420の形状を同等にすることができ、部材の共通化をすることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the drive gear 473 as described above, the proper meshing relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 is appropriate. Can be achieved. Further, the shapes of the pair of slide members 420 can be made equivalent, and the members can be standardized.

図19(a)に示すように、駆動ギア473と前側壁部422cとは、前後方向(図19(a)紙面上下方向)に干渉する。一方、一対のスライド部材420が退避位置に配置された状態(図16参照)において、正面視で切り欠き部422dの外形から間隔を空けた状態で駆動ギア473を視認することができる。なお、この「正面視で切り欠き部422dの外形から間隔を空けた状態で駆動ギア473を視認することができる」スライド部材420と駆動ギア473との位置関係を特定位相位置として説明する。 As shown in FIG. 19A, the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c interfere with each other in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 19A). On the other hand, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being spaced from the outer shape of the cutout portion 422d in the front view. The positional relationship between the slide member 420 and the drive gear 473, which "can visually recognize the drive gear 473 with a distance from the outer shape of the notch portion 422d in front view," will be described as a specific phase position.

そのため、一対のスライド部材420が可動範囲の終端である退避位置(特定位相位置)に配置された状態において、駆動ギア473を被伝達脚部422に形成される切り欠き部422dを通して引き抜くことができる。これによりスライド部材420をベース部材410から取り外すことなく駆動ギア473を交換することができる(図17(b)参照)。よって、駆動ギア473のメンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 Therefore, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (specific phase position) which is the end of the movable range, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 422. .. As a result, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 420 from the base member 410 (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, the maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

ここで、一対のスライド部材420は、駆動ギア473を挟んで対向配置され、それぞれの被伝達脚部422のラックギア422aで駆動ギア473に歯合される。この状態で、一対のスライド部材420は双方が同様に退避位置(図16参照)に配置される状態を形成する必要があるので、駆動ギア473とラックギア422aとは任意のギア歯で歯合させれば良いものではない。即ち、駆動ギア473と一対のスライド部材420のラックギア422aとは、相互に噛み合うギア歯の関係が固定される(歯合時に駆動ギア473の代表ギア歯と当接されるラックギア422aの代表ギア歯が規定される)適正歯合状態を形成する。 Here, the pair of slide members 420 are arranged so as to face each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween, and are meshed with the drive gear 473 by the rack gears 422a of the respective legs to be transmitted 422. In this state, since it is necessary to form a state in which both of the pair of slide members 420 are similarly arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a are meshed with arbitrary gear teeth. It's not good. That is, the relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 is fixed so that they mesh with each other (the representative gear tooth of the rack gear 422a that comes into contact with the representative gear tooth of the drive gear 473 at the time of meshing). Is defined) to form a proper tooth alignment.

その適正歯合状態を形成するために、スライド部材420の切り欠き部422dを利用することができる。即ち、切り欠き部422dは、上述した通り、一対のスライド部材420が退避位置(図16参照)に配置された状態において、駆動ギア473の歯先円より若干大きな代表円が駆動ギア473の回転軸と中心軸を合わせて配置された場合に、前後方向(図16紙面垂直方向)で前側壁部422cに投影される部分に形成される。 A cutout portion 422d of the slide member 420 can be used to form the proper meshing state. That is, in the notch portion 422d, as described above, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the representative circle slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473 rotates the drive gear 473. When the axis and the central axis are aligned, it is formed in a portion projected on the front side wall portion 422c in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 16).

そのため、一対のスライド部材420を退避位置に配置させた状態(図16参照)で、切り欠き部422dが対向配置される。この状態で、駆動ギア473が切り欠き部422dを通して移動される(図16紙面垂直方向へ移動される)ことで、駆動ギア473とラックギア422aとを適正歯合状態で噛み合わせることができる。 Therefore, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the notch portions 422d are arranged so as to face each other. In this state, the drive gear 473 is moved through the notch portion 422d (moved in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 16), so that the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a can be meshed with each other in an appropriate meshing state.

一対のスライド部材420を退避位置(特定位相位置)に配置した状態において、一対のスライド部材420は上下方向外側への移動が遮られる(上側のスライド部材420は上方への、下側のスライド部材420は下方へのそれ以上の移動が遮られる)。即ち、スライド部材420を退避位置側へ無作為に移動させた場合、スライド部材420は少なくとも退避位置で停止される(移動抵抗が増加する)。 When the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position (specific phase position), the pair of slide members 420 are blocked from moving outward in the vertical direction (the upper slide member 420 is the upper slide member, and the lower slide member 420 is the lower slide member. 420 blocks further downward movement). That is, when the slide member 420 is randomly moved to the retracted position side, the slide member 420 is stopped at least at the retracted position (movement resistance increases).

よって、メンテナンス作業者が駆動ギア473を取り替える際のスライド部材420の位置調節において、スライド部材420を無作為に退避方向へ移動させてもスライド部材420は可動範囲の終端である退避位置(特定位相位置)で停止される。これにより、切り欠き部422dを通して駆動ギア473を容易に取り出すことができ、また、その状態で駆動ギア473を一対のスライド部材420のラックギア422aに容易に噛み合わせることができる。従って、メンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 Therefore, in adjusting the position of the slide member 420 when the maintenance worker replaces the drive gear 473, even if the slide member 420 is randomly moved in the retracting direction, the slide member 420 is at the retracted position (specific phase) which is the end of the movable range. Position) is stopped. As a result, the drive gear 473 can be easily taken out through the notch portion 422d, and the drive gear 473 can be easily meshed with the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 in that state. Therefore, maintainability can be improved.

図17(a)を参照して、駆動装置470の配置について説明する。上述した通り、一対のスライド部材420には切り欠き部422dが形成されるので、一対のスライド部材420を退避位置に配置した状態で、ベース部材410に、組立状態の駆動装置470を締結固定することができる。これにより、駆動装置470の配設自由度を向上させることができる。 The arrangement of the drive device 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a). As described above, since the notch portion 422d is formed in the pair of slide members 420, the drive device 470 in the assembled state is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 with the pair of slide members 420 arranged in the retracted position. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the drive device 470 can be improved.

即ち、スライド部材420の前側壁部422cに切り欠き部422dが形成されていない場合(例えば、ラックギア422aの全領域において前側壁部422cが形成されている場合)、駆動装置470をベース部材410に組み付けようとしても、駆動ギア473が前側壁部422cに当接してしまい、駆動装置470をベース部材410に組み付けることができない。そのため、駆動装置470を前側壁部422cの反対側に配設せざるを得ず、駆動装置470の配設自由度が低かった。 That is, when the cutout portion 422d is not formed in the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (for example, when the front side wall portion 422c is formed in the entire region of the rack gear 422a), the drive device 470 is used as the base member 410. Even if it is attempted to be assembled, the drive gear 473 comes into contact with the front side wall portion 422c, and the drive device 470 cannot be assembled to the base member 410. Therefore, the drive device 470 has to be arranged on the opposite side of the front side wall portion 422c, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the drive device 470 is low.

これに対し、本実施形態では、前側壁部422cに切り欠き部422dが形成されるので、その切り欠き部422dを通して駆動ギア473を前後方向へ移動させることで、駆動装置470をスライド部材420の前側(前側壁部422cの配設される側)に配設することができる。よって、駆動装置470の配設自由度を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the notch portion 422d is formed in the front side wall portion 422c. Therefore, by moving the drive gear 473 in the front-rear direction through the notch portion 422d, the drive device 470 is moved to the slide member 420. It can be arranged on the front side (the side on which the front side wall portion 422c is arranged). Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the drive device 470 can be improved.

また、駆動ギア473と駆動モータ472との間の層にスライド部材420の前側壁部422cが形成され、スライド部材420を退避位置から移動させることで、駆動ギア473と前側壁部422cとを前後方向視(図16紙面垂直方向視)で重ねることができる。これにより、駆動装置470の交換の際に、駆動モータ472と駆動ギア473とを合わせて外すか、駆動ギア473は残して駆動モータ472だけを外すかを選択することができる。 Further, a front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 is formed in the layer between the drive gear 473 and the drive motor 472, and by moving the slide member 420 from the retracted position, the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c are moved back and forth. It can be overlapped in a directional view (FIG. 16 vertical view on paper). Thereby, when replacing the drive device 470, it is possible to select whether to remove the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 together, or to remove only the drive motor 472 while leaving the drive gear 473.

即ち、スライド部材420の前側壁部422cに駆動ギア473を当接させたまま駆動モータ472を引き抜くことで、駆動モータ472と駆動ギア473とを分離させることができる(図19(b)参照)。これにより、駆動ギア473と被伝達脚部422のラックギア422aとの歯合状態を維持したまま駆動モータ472を交換することができる。よって、駆動モータ472の交換の前後において、駆動ギア473と被伝達脚部422のラックギア422aとの再度の噛み合わせ調整を不要とすることができ、メンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 That is, the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be separated by pulling out the drive motor 472 while keeping the drive gear 473 in contact with the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 19B). .. As a result, the drive motor 472 can be replaced while maintaining the meshed state between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422. Therefore, before and after the replacement of the drive motor 472, it is possible to eliminate the need for re-meshing adjustment of the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422, and it is possible to improve maintainability.

このとき、駆動ギア473は、駆動ギア473を挟んで対向配置される一対の被伝達脚部422の前側壁部422cと前後方向視(図18紙面垂直方向視)で重なる(図18参照)。よって、駆動モータ472から駆動ギア473が引き抜かれる際には、少なくとも回転軸を挟んで対向配置される2点から駆動ギア473に力が加えられる。そのため、駆動ギア473に対して駆動モータ472が傾斜することが抑制される。 At this time, the drive gear 473 overlaps with the front side wall portion 422c of the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged so as to face each other with the drive gear 473 in between in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 18 in the vertical direction on the paper) (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the drive gear 473 is pulled out from the drive motor 472, a force is applied to the drive gear 473 from at least two points arranged so as to face each other across the rotation shaft. Therefore, tilting of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 is suppressed.

また、駆動モータ472を締結板部471から引き抜く際に、駆動モータ472を規制壁部471a,471bに押し当てながら規制壁部471a,471bに沿わせて移動させることができるので、駆動モータ472の軸心が駆動ギア473に対して傾くことを抑制することができる。これにより、駆動ギア473が変形することを抑制することができる。 Further, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471, the drive motor 472 can be moved along the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b while being pressed against the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b, so that the drive motor 472 can be moved. It is possible to prevent the axis from tilting with respect to the drive gear 473. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive gear 473 from being deformed.

図19(a)に示すように、一方の規制壁部471aが駆動モータ472のモータケースの前端面よりも締結板部471側へ退避して形成される。これにより、一方の規制壁部471aの延設端を支点Sにして駆動モータ472を引き抜くことができる。即ち、一方の規制壁部471aの延設端と駆動モータ472の側面とは隣接配置されるので、一方の規制壁部471aの延設端を支点Sとすると共に駆動モータ472の側面(図19(a)では理解を容易とするために作用点Wが駆動モータ472の内部に図示される)を作用点Wとして駆動モータ472に力を加える場合の支点Sと作用点Wとの距離を最短とすることができる。それにより、力点の設定次第で、駆動モータ472の引き抜きに要する力を抑えることができる。なお、図19(a)に支点Sと作用点Wとの関係および仮想的な梃子を図示する。 As shown in FIG. 19A, one of the regulation wall portions 471a is formed so as to retract from the front end surface of the motor case of the drive motor 472 to the fastening plate portion 471 side. As a result, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out with the extended end of one of the regulation wall portions 471a as the fulcrum S. That is, since the extended end of one regulation wall portion 471a and the side surface of the drive motor 472 are arranged adjacent to each other, the extended end of one regulation wall portion 471a is used as a fulcrum S and the side surface of the drive motor 472 (FIG. 19). In (a), the action point W is shown inside the drive motor 472 for easy understanding), and the distance between the fulcrum S and the action point W when a force is applied to the drive motor 472 is the shortest. Can be. Thereby, depending on the setting of the force point, the force required for pulling out the drive motor 472 can be suppressed. Note that FIG. 19A illustrates the relationship between the fulcrum S and the point of action W and a virtual lever.

また、一方の規制壁部471aと対向配置される他方の規制壁部471bに駆動モータ472を押し当てながら駆動モータ472を引き抜くことができる。これにより、駆動モータ472を引き抜く際に駆動モータ472が駆動ギア473に対して傾く傾斜の度合いを抑えることができる。 Further, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor 472 against the other regulation wall portion 471b arranged to face the one regulation wall portion 471a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of inclination of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 when the drive motor 472 is pulled out.

図19(a)に示すように、他方の規制壁部471bは一方の規制壁部471aの延設端部よりも前方(図19(a)上方)へ張り出して形成される。これにより、一方の規制壁部471aを支点Sとして駆動モータ472を引き抜く場合に、作用点Wが他方の規制壁部471bに最も近接される状態W1において、他方の規制壁部471bから駆動モータ472に対して作用点Wへ押し戻す方向へ向いた力をかけることができる。そのため、他方の規制壁部471bにより駆動モータ472の駆動軸と垂直方向への移動を防止することができる。これにより、駆動モータ472を引き抜く際に駆動モータ472が一方の規制壁部471aから離間する方向へ移動することを確実に防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 19A, the other regulation wall portion 471b is formed so as to project forward (upper in FIG. 19A) from the extended end portion of the one regulation wall portion 471a. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out with one regulation wall portion 471a as the fulcrum S, the drive motor 472 is driven from the other regulation wall portion 471b in the state W1 in which the action point W is closest to the other regulation wall portion 471b. A force can be applied in the direction of pushing back to the point of action W. Therefore, the other regulating wall portion 471b can prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in a direction away from one of the regulation wall portions 471a when the drive motor 472 is pulled out.

次いで、図20を参照して、複合動作ユニット400の半月部材460の回転に関わる二層ギア452について説明する。図20(a)は、二層ギア452の正面図であり、図20(b)は、二層ギア452の背面図である。 Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the two-layer gear 452 involved in the rotation of the half-moon member 460 of the composite operation unit 400 will be described. 20 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 452, and FIG. 20 (b) is a rear view of the double-layer gear 452.

図20(a)及び図20(b)に示すように、二層ギア452は円板部452cを境に正面側と背面側とで異なるギア歯が刻設されるギア部材である。図20(a)に示すように、摺動壁部452dに隣接される始動ギア歯452b1が、中間ギア歯452b2に比較して大型に形成される。そのため、後述するように、反転ギア453との衝突(当接)に耐え得る耐久性を始動ギア歯452b1に持たせることができる。本実施形態では、摺動壁部452dに隣接される始動ギア歯452b1のみを大型に形成し、中間ギア歯452b2は小型に形成しているので、耐久性の向上と、材料費用の抑制との両立を図ることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the two-layer gear 452 is a gear member in which different gear teeth are engraved on the front side and the back side with the disk portion 452c as a boundary. As shown in FIG. 20A, the starting gear tooth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d is formed to be larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. Therefore, as will be described later, the starting gear tooth 452b1 can be provided with durability that can withstand a collision (contact) with the reversing gear 453. In the present embodiment, only the starting gear tooth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d is formed to be large, and the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 is formed to be small, so that durability is improved and material cost is suppressed. It is possible to achieve both.

二層ギア452は、第1窪み部452b3及び第2窪み部452b4の底を形成する壁面としての窪み底壁部452eと、その窪み底壁部452e及びリング状のリブを連結する押し返しリブ452fと、を備える。 The two-layer gear 452 includes a recessed bottom wall portion 452e as a wall surface forming the bottom of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4, and a push-back rib 452f connecting the recessed bottom wall portion 452e and the ring-shaped rib. , Equipped with.

ここで、第2窪み部452b4は反転ギア453(図23参照)の始動ギア歯453b1を受け入れる窪みとして十分な深さが必要とされる一方で、第1窪み部452b3は反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dが進入する窪みである。そのため、第2窪み部452b4ほどの深さは必要とされないが、本実施形態では、第1窪み部452b3及び第2窪み部452b4の深さが略同一で形成されている。これにより、二層ギア452の成型時における第1窪み部452b3及び第2窪み部452b4付近の樹脂材料の熱収縮量を均一化することができ、二層ギア452の成型性を向上させることができる。 Here, the second recessed portion 452b4 is required to have a sufficient depth as a recess for receiving the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23), while the first recessed portion 452b3 is engaged with the reversing gear 453. It is a recess into which the projecting receiving portion 453d enters. Therefore, the depth of the second recessed portion 452b4 is not required, but in the present embodiment, the depths of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 are formed to be substantially the same. As a result, the amount of heat shrinkage of the resin material in the vicinity of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 at the time of molding the two-layer gear 452 can be made uniform, and the moldability of the two-layer gear 452 can be improved. can.

図20(a)に示すように、摺動壁部452d、中間ギア歯452b2の歯底が形成する壁部および窪み底壁部452eで囲まれる領域に空間が形成される。このとき、摺動壁部452d及び窪み底壁部452eの板厚が略同一で形成されることで、樹脂成形に特有なヒケの発生を抑制することができる。また、樹脂材料の材料費用を抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 20A, a space is formed in a region surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d, the wall portion formed by the tooth bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e. At this time, since the sliding wall portion 452d and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e are formed to have substantially the same plate thickness, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks peculiar to resin molding. In addition, the material cost of the resin material can be suppressed.

ここで、窪み底壁部452eは、二層ギア452の機能を確保するために必ずしも必要ではない。一方で、窪み底壁部452eによって、始動ギア歯452b1及び摺動壁部452dが連結される態様で形成されている。そのため、始動ギア歯452b1が反転ギア453と当接する際の衝撃を分散させることができる(図23(b)参照)。 Here, the recessed bottom wall portion 452e is not always necessary to secure the function of the two-layer gear 452. On the other hand, the recessed bottom wall portion 452e is formed in such a manner that the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the sliding wall portion 452d are connected to each other. Therefore, the impact when the starting gear tooth 452b1 comes into contact with the reversing gear 453 can be dispersed (see FIG. 23B).

押し返しリブ452fは、第2窪み部452b4の窪み底壁部452eと連結される。ここで、始動ギア歯452b1に反転ギア453が当接される際に生じる力Fの力線の方向(図23(b)参照)が押し返しリブ452fへ向いている。これにより、二層ギア452の摺動壁部452d、中間ギア歯452b2の歯底が形成する壁部および窪み底壁部452eで囲まれる領域に空間を形成する場合であっても、押し返しリブ452fにより力Fに対する抵抗力を向上させることができる。よって、当接時の衝撃で始動ギア歯452b1が変形することを防止することができる。 The push-back rib 452f is connected to the recessed bottom wall portion 452e of the second recessed portion 452b4. Here, the direction of the force line of the force F generated when the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear tooth 452b1 (see FIG. 23B) is directed toward the pushback rib 452f. As a result, even when a space is formed in the region surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, the wall portion formed by the tooth bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, the push-back rib 452f Therefore, the resistance to the force F can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 452b1 from being deformed by the impact at the time of contact.

図20(b)に示すように、ギア歯452aは二層ギア452の周囲に亘って形成される。ギア歯452aは、伝達ギア451と常時歯合されるため(図21(b)参照)、スライド部材420が上下にスライド移動すると二層ギア452は常時回転される(図21(a)参照)。 As shown in FIG. 20B, the gear teeth 452a are formed around the two-layer gear 452. Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 21B), the two-layer gear 452 is constantly rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down (see FIG. 21A). ..

次いで、図21から図26を参照して、複合動作ユニット400の移動の詳細について、即ち、駆動装置470の駆動力が伝達されることで移動されるスライド部材420及び半月部材460の動作について説明する。図21から図26は複合動作ユニット400の動作を時系列で説明するものである。なお、図21から図26では、理解を容易とするために、背面カバー430の図示が省略される。 Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the details of the movement of the composite operation unit 400, that is, the operations of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 that are moved by transmitting the driving force of the driving device 470 will be described. do. 21 to 26 show the operation of the combined operation unit 400 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 21 to 26, the illustration of the back cover 430 is omitted for ease of understanding.

図21(a)及び図22(a)は、複合動作ユニット400の背面図であり、図21(b)及び図22(b)は、二層ギア452及び反転ギア453の背面図である。なお、図21では、一対のスライド部材420が退避位置に配置された状態が図示され、図22では、一対のスライド部材が退避位置から所定距離スライド移動されると共に、反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dの端部が二層ギア452の第1窪み部452b3と対向配置される状態が図示される。また、図21(b)及び図22(b)において、二層ギア452は分断ギア歯452b及び摺動壁部452dが実線で図示され、ギア歯452a及び円板部452cが想像線で図示される。 21 (a) and 22 (a) are rear views of the composite operation unit 400, and FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. Note that FIG. 21 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 22 shows that the pair of slide members are slid by a predetermined distance from the retracted position and the reversing gear 453 engages with each other. The state in which the end portion of the shape receiving portion 453d is arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear tooth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are shown by imaginary lines. NS.

図21(b)に示すように、一対のスライド部材420が退避位置に配置された状態において、反転ギア453は、係合突状受け部453dの円弧状凹部453cが二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dに面で外接される。これにより、反転ギア453の姿勢を維持することができる。 As shown in FIG. 21B, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position, in the reversing gear 453, the arcuate recess 453c of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d slides the two-layer gear 452. It is circumscribed to the wall portion 452d on a surface. As a result, the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

この場合、係合突状受け部453dと摺動壁部452dとの機械的嵌合が反転ギア453の姿勢を維持する保持機構として作用する。そのため、反転ギア453の姿勢を維持するために、弾性バネなどの他の部材を配設することを不要とできる。 In this case, the mechanical fitting of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and the sliding wall portion 452d acts as a holding mechanism for maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453. Therefore, in order to maintain the posture of the reversing gear 453, it is not necessary to dispose of another member such as an elastic spring.

また、二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dと反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dとが、二層ギア452の回転軸と反転ギア453の回転軸とを結ぶ直線の両側で当接される。そのため、反転ギア453の回転方向に寄らず反転ギア453の回転を防止することができ、反転ギア453の姿勢を維持することができる。 Further, the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other on both sides of a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the double-layer gear 452 and the rotating shaft of the reversing gear 453. Will be done. Therefore, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 can be prevented regardless of the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453, and the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

図22(b)に示すように、一対のスライド部材420が移動されると、複数の伝達ギア451のうちベース部材410の常設ラックギア414aと歯合される伝達ギア451が回転される。その回転に伴いその他の伝達ギア451及び伝達ギア451にギア歯452で歯合される二層ギア452も回転される。その一方で、反転ギア453は二層ギア452に歯合されていないので、退避位置と同様の姿勢に維持される。 As shown in FIG. 22B, when the pair of slide members 420 are moved, the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 among the plurality of transmission gears 451 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the two-layer gear 452, which is meshed with the other transmission gear 451 and the transmission gear 451 by the gear teeth 452, is also rotated. On the other hand, since the reversing gear 453 is not meshed with the two-layer gear 452, it is maintained in the same posture as the retracted position.

一対のスライド部材420が移動している間、係合突状受け部453dの円弧状凹部453cは、二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dから摺動摩擦を受ける。本実施形態では、係合突状受け部453dの円弧状凹部453cが二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dに面で外接されることで、摺動摩擦が一箇所に集中することを抑制し、円弧状凹部453cの全体に摩擦力を分散させることができる。これにより、反転ギア453に二層ギア452から局所的に大きな力が加えられることを抑制することができる。また、二層ギア452と反転ギア453とが当接する箇所が増加することで、反転ギア453の姿勢を維持する効果を向上させることができる。 While the pair of slide members 420 are moving, the arcuate recess 453c of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d receives sliding friction from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452. In the present embodiment, the arcuate recess 453c of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d is circumscribed on the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to prevent the sliding friction from being concentrated in one place. The frictional force can be dispersed throughout the arcuate recess 453c. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large force from being locally applied to the reversing gear 453 from the two-layer gear 452. Further, by increasing the number of places where the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

図23(a)及び図23(b)は、二層ギア452及び反転ギア453の背面図である。なお、図23(a)では、図22(b)から二層ギア452が背面視で反時計回りに所定量回転された状態が図示され、図23(b)では、図23(a)の状態から更に二層ギア452が背面視で反時計回りに所定量回転された状態が図示される。また、図23において、二層ギア452は分断ギア歯452b及び摺動壁部452dが実線で図示され、ギア歯452a及び円板部452cが想像線で図示される。 23 (a) and 23 (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. Note that FIG. 23 (a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from FIG. 22 (b), and FIG. 23 (b) shows the state of FIG. 23 (a). A state in which the two-layer gear 452 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state is shown. Further, in FIG. 23, in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are shown by imaginary lines.

図22(b)で上述したように、反転ギア453が二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1に当接される前に、反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dの端部が二層ギア452の第1窪み部452b3と対向配置される。 As described above in FIG. 22B, the end of the engaging protrusion 453d of the reversing gear 453 is a double-layer gear before the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452. It is arranged so as to face the first recessed portion 452b3 of 452.

このとき、第1窪み部452b3と対向配置される係合突状受け部453dの端部は二層ギア452と当接されていないので、反転ギア453の姿勢を維持する効果が解除され、少なくとも1の回転方向(図22(b)紙面時計回り方向)への回転が可能となる。 At this time, since the end portion of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3 is not in contact with the two-layer gear 452, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453 is released, and at least It is possible to rotate in the rotation direction of 1 (clockwise in FIG. 22B).

図23(a)に示すように、二層ギア452が図23(a)の反時計回りに所定量回転されることで、反転ギア453が二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1に当接される前に回転される。即ち、二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dから反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dにかけられる摺動摩擦により反転ギア453が回転される。このとき、反転ギア453は、係合突状受け部453dを二層ギア452の第1窪み部452b3に進入させる態様で回転される。 As shown in FIG. 23A, the double-layer gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount in FIG. 23A, so that the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452. It is rotated before it is turned on. That is, the reversing gear 453 is rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453. At this time, the reversing gear 453 is rotated in such a manner that the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d is brought into the first recessed portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452.

即ち、反転ギア453は、二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dから反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dにかけられる摺動摩擦により若干回転された(図23(a)参照)後で、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1に当接される(図23(b)参照)。これにより、反転ギア453と二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1とが当接する時の衝撃を抑制することができる。 That is, the reversing gear 453 was slightly rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23A). It comes into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the layer gear 452 (see FIG. 23B). As a result, it is possible to suppress the impact when the reversing gear 453 and the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 come into contact with each other.

図23(b)に示すように、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と反転ギア453とが当接され始める位置が、二層ギア452の回転軸と反転ギア453の回転軸とを結ぶ直線よりも、二層ギア452の回転方向の逆側へ戻された位置(図23(b)上方)に形成される。 As shown in FIG. 23B, the position where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to come into contact with each other is a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the double-layer gear 452 and the rotating shaft of the reversing gear 453. The two-layer gear 452 is formed at a position (upper in FIG. 23B) returned to the opposite side in the rotation direction.

これにより、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と反転ギア453とが当接され始める際に反転ギア453に加えられる力が、反転ギア453の回転方向を向く成分と、反転ギア453の回転軸へ向く成分とに分けて伝えられる。そのため、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と反転ギア453との当接開始時に反転ギア453が回転しすぎることを抑制することができる。 As a result, the force applied to the reversing gear 453 when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to come into contact with each other is a component that points in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 and the rotation shaft of the reversing gear 453. It is transmitted separately from the ingredients that are suitable for gears. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reversing gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453.

即ち、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1が反転ギア453に当接され始める場合、はじめから複数歯で互いに歯合されるわけでは無い。そのため、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1に当接される際に反転ギア453の回転方向に加えられる力が過剰な場合、反転ギア453が二層ギア452の回転速度よりも高速で回転(移動)することがある。その場合、二層ギア452と反転ギア453との噛み合わせに失敗する恐れがある。 That is, when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 start to come into contact with the reversing gear 453, the plurality of teeth do not mesh with each other from the beginning. Therefore, when the force applied in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 when abutting the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 is excessive, the reversing gear 453 rotates at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 452 ( May move). In that case, the meshing of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 may fail.

一方、本実施形態によれば、当接開始時に二層ギア452から反転ギア453へ加えられる力を、反転ギア453の回転方向と垂直な方向(回転軸へ向く方向)にも生じさせることによって、反転ギア453の回転抵抗を一時的に上昇させることができる。即ち、反転ギア453を回転軸に押しつけることで、回転抵抗を上昇させることができる。これにより、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1との当接開始時に反転ギア453が回転しすぎることを抑制することができる。 On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a force applied from the two-layer gear 452 to the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is also generated in a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 (direction toward the rotation axis). , The rotational resistance of the reversing gear 453 can be temporarily increased. That is, the rotational resistance can be increased by pressing the reversing gear 453 against the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reversing gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact of the two-layer gear 452 with the starting gear teeth 452b1.

また、始動ギア歯452b1,453b1が二層ギア452のギア歯452aよりも大型に形成されることで、二層ギア452と反転ギア453との歯合開始時における歯外れを防止することができる。 Further, since the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are formed to be larger than the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 452, it is possible to prevent the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 from coming off at the start of meshing. ..

ここで、ギア歯は大型化するほど形成される遊び(バックラッシ)が大きくなるため、歯が大型化するほど途中から歯合されるギア同士の位置関係(位相関係)のずれを大きく許容できるようになる。即ち、ギアの歯が小型化すると、歯合されるギア同士の位置関係(位相関係)がわずかにずれるだけでも、歯合される歯が一歯ずれる恐れがある。 Here, since the play (backlash) formed becomes larger as the gear teeth become larger, the larger the teeth, the larger the deviation of the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears to be meshed from the middle can be tolerated. become. That is, when the teeth of the gears are miniaturized, even if the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears to be meshed is slightly shifted, there is a possibility that the teeth to be meshed are shifted by one tooth.

本実施形態では、駆動装置470(図10参照)の駆動力が伝達される伝達ギア451と二層ギア452のギア歯452aとの間で発生する遊び(バックラッシ)よりも、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と反転ギア453の始動ギア歯453b1との間で発生する遊び(バックラッシ)の方が大きくなる。即ち、伝達ギア451との関係で生じる二層ギア452の位相関係のずれは、二層ギア452と反転ギア453との間で生じる位相関係のずれより小さく、許容可能なものである。これにより、二層ギア452と反転ギア453との歯合開始時における歯のずれを防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the double-layer gear 452 has more play (backlash) generated between the transmission gear 451 to which the driving force of the drive device 470 (see FIG. 10) is transmitted and the gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 452. The play (backlash) generated between the starting gear tooth 452b1 and the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 becomes larger. That is, the phase relationship shift of the two-layer gear 452 that occurs in relation to the transmission gear 451 is smaller than the phase relationship shift that occurs between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453, and is acceptable. As a result, it is possible to prevent tooth misalignment at the start of meshing between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453.

二層ギア452が回転方向で反転ギア453と当接され始める場合、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1が反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dに当接され始める。即ち、係合突状受け部453dが、始動ギア歯452b1と歯合され始めるギア歯の代わりとして使用される。これにより、反転ギア453の耐久性を向上させることができる。 When the two-layer gear 452 begins to come into contact with the reversing gear 453 in the rotational direction, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 begin to come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453. That is, the engaging protrusion 453d is used as a substitute for the gear tooth that begins to mesh with the starting gear tooth 452b1. Thereby, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

即ち、円弧状凹部453cが形成される係合突状受け部453dは、二層ギア452のギア歯と歯合する役割の部分ではなく、二層ギア452の外周面に当接することで反転ギア453の姿勢の維持を図る役割の部分である。そのため、ギア歯のように、歯合される相手側のギア歯の大きさに合わせて大きさが制限されるものではない。また、二層ギア452の係合突状受け部453dと反転ギア453との当接開始時に当接される部分は大型で丈夫であることが望ましく、係合突状受け部453dをその部分に使用することで、反転ギア453の耐久性を向上させることができる。 That is, the engaging protrusion 453d on which the arcuate recess 453c is formed is not a portion that has a role of engaging with the gear teeth of the two-layer gear 452, but a reversing gear by abutting on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 452. It is a part of the role of maintaining the posture of 453. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth on the mating side. Further, it is desirable that the portion of the two-layer gear 452 that is brought into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d and the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is large and durable, and the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d is used as that portion. By using it, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

スライド部材420が駆動装置470(図10参照)の駆動力で移動されることで常設ラックギア414aと歯合される伝達ギア451が回転され、それに伴い二層ギア452が回転される。即ち、駆動装置470と二層ギア452とは直接歯合されるものではなく、少なくとも駆動ギア473に歯合される被伝達脚部422が、駆動装置470と二層ギア452との間に介在する。これにより、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1と反転ギア453との当接時の衝撃が、緩和された状態で駆動装置470に伝えられる。そのため、当接時の衝撃によって駆動装置470が破損することを防止することができる。 When the slide member 420 is moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10), the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a is rotated, and the two-layer gear 452 is rotated accordingly. That is, the drive device 470 and the two-layer gear 452 are not directly meshed with each other, and at least the transmitted leg portion 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 is interposed between the drive device 470 and the two-layer gear 452. do. As a result, the impact at the time of contact between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 is transmitted to the drive device 470 in a relaxed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive device 470 from being damaged by the impact at the time of contact.

図24(a)及び図25(a)は、複合動作ユニット400の背面図であり、図24(b)及び図25(b)は、二層ギア452及び反転ギア453の背面図である。なお、図24では、一対の半月部材460が図22(a)の状態からそれぞれ所定量回転された状態が図示され、図25では、一対の半月部材460が図22(a)の状態からそれぞれ180度回転し終えた直後の状態が図示される。また、図24(b)及び図25(b)において、二層ギア452は分断ギア歯452b及び摺動壁部452dが実線で図示され、ギア歯452a及び円板部452cが想像線で図示される。 24 (a) and 25 (a) are rear views of the composite operation unit 400, and FIGS. 24 (b) and 25 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. In FIG. 24, a state in which the pair of half-moon members 460 are rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 22 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 25, the pair of half-moon members 460 are respectively rotated from the state of FIG. 22 (a). The state immediately after the rotation of 180 degrees is completed is shown in the figure. Further, in FIGS. 24 (b) and 25 (b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear tooth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are shown by imaginary lines. NS.

図24(b)に示すように、半月部材460が回転される状態では、二層ギア452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア453の中間ギア歯453b2とが歯合される。 As shown in FIG. 24B, in a state where the half-moon member 460 is rotated, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453 are meshed with each other.

本実施形態では、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1が中間ギア歯452b2に比較して大型に形成される。そのため、反転ギア453との当接開始時に反転ギア453に当接される始動ギア歯452b1の耐久性が向上され、二層ギア452の破損を防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed to be larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 452b1 that comes into contact with the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact with the reversing gear 453 is improved, and damage to the double-layer gear 452 can be prevented.

また、図24(b)に示すように、二層ギア452と反転ギア453とが中間ギア歯452b2,453b2で歯合されることで、歯合開始時よりも歯合継続時の方がバックラッシを小さくすることができる。これにより、歯合継続時における反転ギア453の回転を滑らかなものにすることができる。よって、歯合開始時に衝突される始動ギア歯452b1の耐久性向上と、反転ギア453の回転の滑らかさの向上との両立を図ることができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are meshed with the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2, so that the backlash occurs when the meshing continues rather than when the meshing starts. Can be made smaller. As a result, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be made smooth. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 that collide with each other at the start of meshing and to improve the smoothness of rotation of the reversing gear 453.

また、二層ギア452の中間ギア歯452b2がギア歯452aに比較して小型に形成されるので、二層ギア452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア453の中間ギア歯453b2との周方向の噛み合いの誤差(遊び)は、ギア歯452aと伝達ギア451との噛み合いの誤差に比較して小さく生じる。これにより、歯合継続時の反転ギア453の動作の正確さを、ギア歯452aと伝達ギア451との噛み合いの誤差以下に維持することができる。 Further, since the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed smaller than the gear teeth 452a, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453 mesh with each other in the circumferential direction. The error (play) of is smaller than the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451. As a result, the accuracy of the operation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be maintained below the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451.

図25に示すように、半月部材460が180度回転し終えたところで、二層ギア452と反転ギア453との歯合は解除され、二層ギア452の摺動壁部452dと反転ギアの円弧状凹部453cとが面で当接される。そのため、反転ギア453の姿勢が維持され、その反転ギア453の係止突部453e(図12参照)と円弧状壁部461c(図15参照)とが相対回転不能に嵌合される半月部材460の姿勢も維持される。 As shown in FIG. 25, when the half-moon member 460 finishes rotating 180 degrees, the engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 is released, and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the circle of the reversing gear. The arc-shaped recess 453c is brought into contact with the surface. Therefore, the posture of the reversing gear 453 is maintained, and the locking protrusion 453e (see FIG. 12) and the arcuate wall portion 461c (see FIG. 15) of the reversing gear 453 are fitted to each other so as not to rotate relative to each other. The posture of is also maintained.

次いで、図26を参照して、半月部材460の爪部材463の動作について説明する。図26(a)及び図26(b)は、複合動作ユニット400の部分背面図である。 Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the operation of the claw member 463 of the half-moon member 460 will be described. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 400.

なお、図26では、ベース部材410の常設ラックギア414aの図示が部分的に省略され、限定ラックギア414bが視認可能とされると共にその部分が拡大視される。また、図26(a)は、異形ギア441の始動ギア歯441aが限定ラックギア414bの始動ギア歯414b1に当接される直前の状態が図示され、図26(b)は、スライドラック442が移動終端まで到達した状態が図示される。 In FIG. 26, the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is partially omitted so that the limited rack gear 414b can be visually recognized and the portion is magnified. Further, FIG. 26A shows a state immediately before the starting gear tooth 441a of the deformed gear 441 comes into contact with the starting gear tooth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, and FIG. 26B shows the slide rack 442 moving. The state of reaching the end is shown.

異形ギア歯441と限定ラックギア414bとの歯合は、異形ギア441が適切な姿勢で限定ラックギア414bに当接されないと、不良となる。即ち、異形ギア441の始動ギア歯441aと限定ラックギア414bの始動ギア歯414b1とが当接される姿勢で異形ギア441が限定ラックギア414bに当接されれば、良好に歯合される。その一方で、例えば、異形ギア441のギア歯であって始動ギア歯441a以外のギア歯と限定ラックギア414bの始動ギア歯414b1とが当接される場合、歯合の途中で歯合不良をおこし、異形ギア441の回転が継続不能となる。この場合、スライド部材420のスライド移動も停止されるので、スライド部材420が動作不良を起こす。 The meshing of the deformed gear teeth 441 and the limited rack gear 414b becomes defective unless the deformed gear 441 comes into contact with the limited rack gear 414b in an appropriate posture. That is, if the deformed gear 441 comes into contact with the limited rack gear 414b in a posture in which the starting gear teeth 441a of the deformed gear 441 and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are in contact with each other, the teeth are satisfactorily meshed. On the other hand, for example, when the gear teeth of the deformed gear 441 other than the starting gear teeth 441a and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b come into contact with each other, a poor meshing occurs in the middle of the meshing. , The rotation of the deformed gear 441 cannot be continued. In this case, the slide movement of the slide member 420 is also stopped, so that the slide member 420 malfunctions.

本実施形態では、スライドラック442が付勢バネ442cの付勢力により左右外方に維持される。異形ギア441は伝達ギア443を介してスライドラック442から力を受ける。そのため、異形ギア441の姿勢を上述した適切な姿勢に維持することができる。 In the present embodiment, the slide rack 442 is maintained to the left and right outward by the urging force of the urging spring 442c. The deformed gear 441 receives a force from the slide rack 442 via the transmission gear 443. Therefore, the posture of the deformed gear 441 can be maintained in the above-mentioned appropriate posture.

図26(b)に示すように、異形ギア441が限定ラックギア414bに歯合され回転されることで、伝達ギア443が回転されると共にスライドラック442が移動される。スライドラック442は、移動の途中で駆動レバー467に当接し、駆動レバー467が回転する。駆動レバー467は、半月部材460の中心ギア462(図15参照)に締結固定されているため、駆動レバー467が回転することで中心ギア462が回転する。これにより、クランクギア464が回転され(図14参照)、爪部材463が張り出す方向へ移動される。よって、スライド部材420の移動に連動して爪部材463を移動させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 26B, the deformed gear 441 is meshed with the limited rack gear 414b and rotated, so that the transmission gear 443 is rotated and the slide rack 442 is moved. The slide rack 442 comes into contact with the drive lever 467 in the middle of movement, and the drive lever 467 rotates. Since the drive lever 467 is fastened and fixed to the center gear 462 (see FIG. 15) of the half-moon member 460, the center gear 462 rotates when the drive lever 467 rotates. As a result, the crank gear 464 is rotated (see FIG. 14), and the claw member 463 is moved in the projecting direction. Therefore, the claw member 463 can be moved in conjunction with the movement of the slide member 420.

次いで、図27及び図28を参照して、第2実施形態における複合動作ユニット2400について説明する。 Next, the combined operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

第1実施形態では、スライド部材420が退避位置に配置された状態において被伝達脚部422の切り欠き部422dが駆動ギア473の正面側で対向配置される場合を説明したが、第2実施形態における複合動作ユニット2400は、スライド部材2420が退避位置から張出位置へ移動する途中で被伝達脚部2422の切り欠き部2422dが駆動ギア473の正面側で対向配置される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 In the first embodiment, the case where the cutout portion 422d of the transmitted leg portion 422 is arranged to face the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 420 is arranged in the retracted position has been described, but the second embodiment has been described. In the combined operation unit 2400 in the above, the cutout portion 2422d of the transmitted leg portion 2422 is arranged to face the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 2420 is moving from the retracted position to the overhanging position. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図27及び図28は一対のスライド部材2420の正面図である。なお、図27は、一対のスライド部材2420が退避位置に配置された状態が図示され、図28は、一対のスライド部材2420が退避位置から移動され第2ギア群450の始動ギア歯452b1及び始動ギア453b1(図23(b)参照)が当接され始める状態が図示される。また、理解を容易とするために駆動装置470の図示が省略される。 27 and 28 are front views of the pair of slide members 2420. Note that FIG. 27 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 28 shows the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start of the second gear group 450 in which the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position. The state in which the gear 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) begins to come into contact with the gear 453b1 is illustrated. Further, the illustration of the drive device 470 is omitted for ease of understanding.

図27に示すように、一対のスライド部材2420が退避位置に配置された状態において、駆動ギア473の正面側(図27紙面手前側)にラックギア422aの前側の歯幅方向側面に覆設される前側壁部2422cが重ねられる。 As shown in FIG. 27, in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged in the retracted position, they are covered on the front side of the drive gear 473 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 27) on the front side of the rack gear 422a in the tooth width direction. The front side wall portion 2422c is overlapped.

図28に示すように、一対のスライド部材2420が、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1及び反転ギア453の始動ギア歯453b1(図23(b)参照)が当接され始める位置に配置された状態において、切り欠き部2422dが駆動ギア473の正面側(図27紙面手前側)に形成される。切り欠き部2422dは、駆動ギア473の歯先円より若干大きな円形状に形成される。 As shown in FIG. 28, a pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at positions where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B) start to come into contact with each other. In the state, the notch portion 2422d is formed on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 27) of the drive gear 473. The notch portion 2422d is formed in a circular shape slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473.

図28に示すように、正面視で切り欠き部2422dの外形から離間された状態で駆動ギア473を視認することができる(特定位相位置)。そのため、駆動ギア473を被伝達脚部2422に形成される切り欠き部2422dを通して引き抜くことができるので、これによりスライド部材2420をベース部材2410から取り外すことなく駆動ギア473を交換することができる。よって、駆動ギア473のメンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 28, the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being separated from the outer shape of the notch portion 2422d in a front view (specific phase position). Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 2422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 2422, whereby the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 2420 from the base member 2410. Therefore, the maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

本実施形態では、一対のスライド部材2420が退避位置から移動され第2ギア群450の始動ギア歯452b1及び始動ギア歯453b1(図23(a)参照)が当接され始める状態で特定位相位置をとるため、メンテナンス作業者はスライド部材2420を移動させる際の抵抗が上昇することを頼りに特定位相位置にスライド部材2420を移動させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the specific phase position is set in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position and the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23A) of the second gear group 450 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to a specific phase position by relying on the increase in resistance when moving the slide member 2420.

即ち、スライド部材2420は移動される際、伝達ギア451(図24(a)参照)がベース部材2410の常設ラックギア414aに常に歯合されている。そのため、伝達ギア451の回転の抵抗が上昇すると、それはスライド部材2420の移動抵抗として把握できる。ここで、伝達ギア451は、二層ギア452と歯合されているため、二層ギア452と反転ギア453とが歯合を開始する際に生じる抵抗が伝達ギア451に伝わる。すると、伝達ギア451の回転の抵抗が上昇するので、スライド部材2420の移動抵抗が上昇する。これにより、メンテナンス作業者は、スライド部材2420の移動抵抗が上昇することを頼りに特定位相位置にスライド部材2420を移動させることができる。 That is, when the slide member 2420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 24A) is always meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 2410. Therefore, when the rotation resistance of the transmission gear 451 increases, it can be grasped as the movement resistance of the slide member 2420. Here, since the transmission gear 451 is meshed with the two-layer gear 452, the resistance generated when the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start meshing is transmitted to the transmission gear 451. Then, the resistance to rotation of the transmission gear 451 increases, so that the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increases. As a result, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to a specific phase position by relying on the increase in the movement resistance of the slide member 2420.

ここで、特定位相位置では、前側壁部2422cが駆動ギア473と重ならないため、駆動ギア473に前側壁部2422cを当接させ駆動ギア473の回転時のぐらつきを抑制する効果が弱まる。 Here, since the front side wall portion 2422c does not overlap with the drive gear 473 at the specific phase position, the effect of bringing the front side wall portion 2422c into contact with the drive gear 473 and suppressing the wobbling of the drive gear 473 during rotation is weakened.

本実施形態では、一対のスライド部材2420の移動中、即ち、駆動ギア473の回転中に特定位相位置(切り欠き部2422dが駆動ギア473と合致する状態)が形成される。そのため、特定位相位置に駆動ギア473が差し掛かる際には駆動ギア473は十分な回転方向(軸垂直方向)への速度を備えている。そのため、特定位相位置において発生しがちな駆動ギア473のぐらつきを、駆動ギア473の回転方向の勢いで緩和させることができる。 In the present embodiment, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473) is formed during the movement of the pair of slide members 2420, that is, during the rotation of the drive gear 473. Therefore, when the drive gear 473 approaches the specific phase position, the drive gear 473 has a sufficient speed in the rotation direction (vertical axis direction). Therefore, the wobbling of the drive gear 473, which tends to occur at a specific phase position, can be alleviated by the momentum in the rotation direction of the drive gear 473.

ベース部材2410は、組立状態において中央側(図27中心側)に突設される三角突起部2415を備える。この三角突起部2415を頼りに一対のスライド部材2420を特定位相位置まで移動させることを容易にすることができる。 The base member 2410 includes a triangular protrusion 2415 projecting from the center side (center side in FIG. 27) in the assembled state. It is possible to easily move the pair of slide members 2420 to a specific phase position by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415.

ここで、遊技機13のメンテナンスにおいて、駆動ギア473ごと駆動モータ472を取りはずす場合、スライド部材2420を特定位相位置に配置させる必要がある。しかし、駆動モータ472がスライド部材2420を隠す態様で正面側に配設されているため(図9参照)、正面側から切り欠き部2422dが駆動ギア473と一致する状態を視認することが困難である。そのため、特定位相位置にスライド部材2420を配置させることが難しい。 Here, in the maintenance of the gaming machine 13, when the drive motor 472 is removed together with the drive gear 473, it is necessary to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position. However, since the drive motor 472 is arranged on the front side in a manner of hiding the slide member 2420 (see FIG. 9), it is difficult to visually recognize the state in which the notch portion 2422d coincides with the drive gear 473 from the front side. be. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position.

一方、三角突起部2415は正面側から視認可能な位置に配置されるため、メンテナンスにおいて三角突起部2415を頼りにスライド部材2410の位置あわせを行うことを容易にすることができる。本実施形態では、一対のスライド部材2420が特定位相位置に配置されると三角突起部2415と、スライド部材2420の端部に形成される三角形の模様とが一連の模様を形成する。これにより、メンテナンス作業者が駆動ギア473を取り外してメンテナンスを行うことを容易にすることができる。 On the other hand, since the triangular protrusion 2415 is arranged at a position visible from the front side, it is possible to easily align the slide member 2410 by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415 for maintenance. In the present embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at a specific phase position, the triangular protrusion 2415 and the triangular pattern formed at the end of the slide member 2420 form a series of patterns. This makes it easy for the maintenance worker to remove the drive gear 473 for maintenance.

次いで、図29及び図30を参照して、第3実施形態における二層ギア3452及び反転ギア3453について説明する。 Next, the two-layer gear 3452 and the reversing gear 3453 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

第1実施形態では、二層ギア452及び反転ギア453の始動ギア歯452b1,453b1が回転軸方向視で大型に形成される場合、即ち、歯たけ及び歯厚が大きくされる場合を説明したが、第3実施形態における二層ギア3452及び反転ギア3453は、始動ギア歯3452b1,3453b1が回転軸方向視では他のギア歯と同一形状に形成される一方で軸方向に大型に形成される、即ち、歯幅が大きく形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are formed to be large in the direction of the rotation axis, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. In the two-layer gear 3452 and the reversing gear 3453 according to the third embodiment, the starting gear teeth 3452b1 and 3453b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, while being formed to be large in the axial direction. That is, a large tooth width is formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図29(a)は、二層ギア3452の正面図であり、図29(b)は、二層ギア3452の底面図であり、図29(c)は、二層ギア3452の側面図である。 29 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 3452, FIG. 29 (b) is a bottom view of the double-layer gear 3452, and FIG. 29 (c) is a side view of the double-layer gear 3452. ..

図29に示すように、二層ギア3452は、摺動壁部452dに隣接して配設されると共に歯幅が大きく形成される始動ギア歯3452b1と、その始動ギア歯3452b1の歯元側の円周方向の側面から二層ギア3452の同心円に沿って延設されると共に始動ギア歯3452b1付近の中間ギア歯452b2の歯元側の正面側端面に固着される円周リブ3452eと、始動ギア歯3452b1の歯元側の径方向の側面から回転軸へ向けて延設されると共に二層ギア3452の本体部の正面側端面に固着される径方向リブ3452fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 29, the two-layer gear 3452 is arranged adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d and has a large tooth width formed on the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the starting gear tooth 3452b1 on the tooth root side. Circumferential rib 3452e extending from the side surface in the circumferential direction along the concentric circles of the two-layer gear 3452 and fixed to the front end surface of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the starting gear. It mainly includes a radial rib 3452f that extends from the radial side surface of the tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation axis and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body portion of the two-layer gear 3452.

始動ギア歯3452b1は、歯たけ及び歯厚は中間ギア歯452b2と略同一とされるが、歯幅は中間ギア歯452b2に比較して大きく形成される。これにより、始動ギア歯3452b1の剛性を向上させることができ、反転ギア3453との歯合開始時に始動ギア歯3452b1が破損することを抑制することができる。 The starting gear tooth 3452b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, but the tooth width is formed larger than that of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 can be improved, and it is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from being damaged at the start of meshing with the reversing gear 3453.

円周リブ3452eは、始動ギア歯3452b1の側面、即ち延設基点において二層ギア3452の軸方向に最も幅広に形成され、始動ギア歯3452b1から離れるほど幅が徐々に短縮される。即ち、図29(b)に示すように、底面視で略三角形状に視認される。円周リブ3452eにより、二層ギア3452の円周方向に沿った始動ギア歯3452bの剛性を向上させることができ、始動ギア歯3452b1が回転方向に屈曲することを防止することができる。 The circumferential rib 3452e is formed to be the widest in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 3452 at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1, that is, the extension base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), it is visually recognized as a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3452e can improve the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3452b along the circumferential direction of the two-layer gear 3452, and can prevent the starting gear teeth 3452b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

また、円周リブ3452eは、始動ギア歯3452b1の付近(本実施形態では始動ギア歯3452b1の2つ隣まで)の中間ギア歯452b2まで延設される。これにより、円周リブ3452eを利用して中間ギア歯452b2の歯元を始動ギア歯3452b1側へ引く力を生じさせることが可能になる。 Further, the circumferential rib 3452e extends to the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 (up to two adjacent to the starting gear tooth 3452b1 in the present embodiment). This makes it possible to generate a force that pulls the tooth root of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 toward the starting gear tooth 3452b1 by using the circumferential rib 3452e.

即ち、始動ギア歯3452b1付近の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア3453とが歯合した場合に中間ギア歯452b2に生じる変形(始動ギア歯3452b1から離間する方向へ向けた変形)を、円周リブ3452eにより抑制することができる。 That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the reversing gear 3453 mesh with each other, the deformation (deformation toward the direction away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1) that occurs in the intermediate gear tooth 452b1 is reduced to the circumferential rib 3452e. Can be suppressed by

円周リブ3452eが始動ギア歯3452b1付近の中間ギア歯452b2までに限って固着されるのは、始動ギア歯3452b1から離れた位置にある中間ギア歯452b2は、回転が定常状態になってから反転ギア3453と歯合されることによる。 The circumferential rib 3452e is fixed only to the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 because the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 located at a position away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 reverses after the rotation becomes steady. By being meshed with the gear 3453.

即ち、始動ギア歯3452b1から離れた中間ギア歯452b2(例えば、一対の始動ギア歯3452b1の中間付近の中間ギア歯452b2)が反転ギア3453と歯合される場合には、既に回転が定常状態となり、反転ギア3453は十分な回転速度を有している。そのため、中間ギア歯452b2が反転ギア3453から受ける力は小さく、円周リブ3452eによる補強が不要なためである。 That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 (for example, the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the middle of the pair of starting gear teeth 3452b1) separated from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is meshed with the reversing gear 3453, the rotation is already in a steady state. , The reversing gear 3453 has a sufficient rotational speed. Therefore, the force received by the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 from the reversing gear 3453 is small, and reinforcement by the circumferential rib 3452e is unnecessary.

径方向リブ3452fは、始動ギア歯3452b1の歯元側の径方向の側面から回転軸へ向けて延設されると共に二層ギア3452の本体部の正面側端面に固着されるので、始動ギア歯3452b1の径方向の剛性を向上させることができる。これにより、二層ギア3452に歯合される反転ギア3453が軸方向に移動され、がたつくことで、始動ギア歯3452b1の正面側端部(図29(b)上端)が回転軸へ向けて力を受けたとしても、始動ギア歯3452b1が倒れることを防止することができる。従って、始動ギア歯3452b1の耐久性を向上させることができる。 The radial rib 3452f extends from the radial side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation axis and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452, so that the starting gear tooth The radial rigidity of 3452b1 can be improved. As a result, the reversing gear 3453 meshed with the two-layer gear 3452 is moved in the axial direction and rattles, so that the front end portion (upper end of FIG. 29B) of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is forced toward the rotation shaft. Even if it receives, it is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from falling. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 can be improved.

図30(a)は、反転ギア3453の正面図であり、図30(b)は、反転ギア3453の底面図であり、図30(c)は、反転ギア3453の側面図である。 30 (a) is a front view of the reversing gear 3453, FIG. 30 (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 3453, and FIG. 30 (c) is a side view of the reversing gear 3453.

図30に示すように、反転ギア3453は、円弧状凹部453cに隣接される始動ギア歯3453b1と、その始動ギア歯3453b1の歯元側の側面から反転ギア3453の同心円に沿って延設されると共に反転ギア3453の本体部に固着される円周リブ3453fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 30, the reversing gear 3453 extends along the concentric circles of the reversing gear 3453 from the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 adjacent to the arcuate recess 453c and the tooth root side of the starting gear tooth 3453b1. Along with this, a circumferential rib 3453f fixed to the main body of the reversing gear 3453 is mainly provided.

始動ギア歯3453b1は、歯たけ及び歯厚は他の中間ギア歯453b2と略同一とされる一方、歯幅は他の中間ギア歯453b2に比較して大きく形成される。これにより、始動ギア歯3453b1の剛性を向上させることができる。 The starting gear tooth 3453b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2, while the tooth width is formed larger than that of the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

円周リブ3453fは、始動ギア歯3453b1の側面、即ち延設基点において軸方向に最も幅広に形成され、始動ギア歯3453b1から離れるほど幅が徐々に短縮される。即ち、図30(b)に示すように、底面視で略三角形状に視認される。円周リブ3453fにより、始動ギア歯3453b1が回転方向に屈曲することを防止することができる。 The circumferential rib 3453f is formed to be the widest in the axial direction on the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1, that is, at the extension base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 30B, it is visually recognized as a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3453f can prevent the starting gear tooth 3453b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

また、円周リブ3453fは、始動ギア歯3453b1に隣接される係合突状受け部453d側へ向けて延設される。これにより二層ギア3452から力が加えられる方向(始動ギア歯3453b1から隣接する係合突状受け部453dへ向かう方向)に対する始動ギア歯3453b1の剛性が向上する。従って、始動ギア歯3453b1の耐久性を向上させることができる。 Further, the circumferential rib 3453f extends toward the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d adjacent to the starting gear tooth 3453b1. As a result, the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 in the direction in which the force is applied from the two-layer gear 3452 (the direction from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 toward the adjacent engaging protrusion 453d) is improved. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

次いで、図31及び図32を参照して、第4実施形態における二層ギア4452及び反転ギア4453について説明する。 Next, the two-layer gear 4452 and the reversing gear 4453 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

第1実施形態では、二層ギア452の始動ギア歯452b1が回転軸方向視で大型に形成される場合、即ち、歯たけ及び歯厚が大きくされる場合を説明したが、第4実施形態における二層ギア4452は、始動ギア歯4452b1が回転軸方向視では他のギア歯と同一形状に形成される一方で歯幅が大きく形成されると共に、始動ギア歯4452b1に挟まれる中間ギア歯4452b2の歯幅が、始動ギア歯4452b1から離れるほどより短縮される態様で形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed to be large in the direction of the rotation axis, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. In the two-layer gear 4452, the starting gear teeth 4452b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, while the tooth width is formed to be large, and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 sandwiched between the starting gear teeth 4452b1. The tooth width is formed in such a manner that the tooth width is shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4452b1 is increased. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図31(a)は、二層ギア4452の正面図であり、図31(b)は、二層ギア4452の底面図であり、図31(c)は、図31(b)のXXXIc−XXXIc線における二層ギア4452の断面図である。 31 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 4452, FIG. 31 (b) is a bottom view of the double-layer gear 4452, and FIG. 31 (c) is a view of XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31 (b). It is sectional drawing of the two-layer gear 4452 in line.

図31に示すように、二層ギア4452は、摺動壁部452dに隣接される一対の始動ギア歯4452b1と、それらの始動ギア歯4452b1の間に形成される中間ギア歯4452b2と、始動ギア歯4452b1と中間ギア歯4452b2との正面側側面に覆設される板状部4452eと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 31, the two-layer gear 4452 includes a pair of starting gear teeth 4452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d, an intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 formed between the starting gear teeth 4452b1, and a starting gear. It mainly includes a plate-shaped portion 4452e that is covered on the front side surface of the tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2.

図31(b)に示すように、始動ギア歯4452b1と中間ギア歯4452b2とで構成される分断ギア歯4452bの歯幅は、始動ギア歯4452b1において最大となり、中間ギア歯4452b2の歯幅が始動ギア歯4452b1から遠ざかるにつれて始動ギア歯4452b1を基準に階段状に短縮される。 As shown in FIG. 31B, the tooth width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b composed of the starting gear tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is maximum in the starting gear tooth 4452b1, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is started. As the distance from the gear tooth 4452b1 increases, the distance from the gear tooth 4452b1 is shortened in a stepwise manner with reference to the starting gear tooth 4452b1.

板状部4452eは、正面視で分断ギア歯4452bの歯底側から歯先円と同等の位置まで張り出す態様で形成されると共に分断ギア歯4452bの正面側側面に覆設される。板状部4452eは分断ギア歯4452bの正面側側面の形成位置に合わせて底面視で滑らかな曲線を描く態様で形成される(図31(b)参照)。 The plate-shaped portion 4452e is formed so as to project from the tooth bottom side of the dividing gear tooth 4452b to a position equivalent to the tip circle when viewed from the front, and is overlaid on the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b. The plate-shaped portion 4452e is formed in a manner of drawing a smooth curve in bottom view according to the formation position of the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b (see FIG. 31 (b)).

ここで、分断ギア歯4452bの正面側側面が同一平面上に形成され、板状部4452eも平面上に形成される場合を考える。この場合、反転ギア4453と二層ギア4452との歯合開始時に反転ギア4453が二層ギア4452の軸方向に位置ずれすることの許容量を大きくするために円板部452cと板状部4452eとの距離を大きくすると、回転中の反転ギア4453の軸方向位置が定まらない。一方で、回転中の反転ギア4453の軸方向位置を正確に定めようとすると、歯合開始時に反転ギア4453が軸方向にわずかに位置ずれすることで、反転ギア4453が板状部4452eの外周面に当接し、歯合不良が生じる恐れがある。 Here, consider a case where the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b is formed on the same plane, and the plate-shaped portion 4452e is also formed on the plane. In this case, the disc portion 452c and the plate-shaped portion 4452e are used in order to increase the allowable amount of the reversing gear 4453 being displaced in the axial direction of the double-layer gear 4452 at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452. If the distance from the gear is increased, the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453 cannot be determined. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to accurately determine the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453, the reversing gear 4453 is slightly displaced in the axial direction at the start of meshing, so that the reversing gear 4453 moves to the outer periphery of the plate-shaped portion 4452e. It may come into contact with the surface and cause poor meshing.

これに対し、本実施形態では、反転ギア4453が二層ギア4452に歯合される前に生じる恐れのある軸方向への(図31(b)上方への)位置ずれを、歯合開始位置である始動ギア歯4452b1付近で最大限許容することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the axial misalignment (upward in FIG. 31B), which may occur before the reversing gear 4453 is meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, is set as the meshing start position. It can be tolerated to the maximum in the vicinity of the starting gear tooth 4452b1 which is.

また、板状部4452eが底面視(図31(b)参照)で始動ギア歯4452b1から離間するほど円板部452cとの距離が短縮される滑らかな曲線を描く態様で形成されている。そのため、反転ギア4453が板状部4452eに当接されることで、歯合が進むにつれて反転ギア4453の軸方向の位置をより大きく修正することができる(図31(b)下方に移動させることができる)。従って、二層ギア4452と反転ギア4453との歯合時の軸方向での位置ずれを、歯合が進むにつれて修正することができる。 Further, the plate-shaped portion 4452e is formed in a manner of drawing a smooth curve in which the distance from the disc portion 452c is shortened as the plate-shaped portion 4452e is separated from the starting gear tooth 4452b1 in the bottom view (see FIG. 31B). Therefore, when the reversing gear 4453 is brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion 4452e, the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 can be further corrected as the teething progresses (moving the reversing gear 4453 downward (FIG. 31 (b)). Can be done). Therefore, the axial misalignment between the two-layer gear 4452 and the reversing gear 4453 at the time of meshing can be corrected as the meshing progresses.

図32(a)は、反転ギア4453の正面図であり、図32(b)は、反転ギア4453の底面図であり、図32(c)は、図32(a)の矢印XXXIIc方向視における反転ギア4453の部分側面図である。 32 (a) is a front view of the reversing gear 4453, FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 4453, and FIG. 32 (c) is a view in the direction of arrow XXXIIc of FIG. 32 (a). It is a partial side view of the reversing gear 4453.

図32に示すように、反転ギア4453は、一対の円弧状凹部453cにそれぞれ隣り合って配設される一対の始動ギア歯4453b1と、その始動ギア歯4453b1に挟まれた領域に形成される中間ギア歯4453b2と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 32, the reversing gear 4453 is an intermediate formed in a region sandwiched between a pair of starting gear teeth 4453b1 arranged adjacent to each other in a pair of arcuate recesses 453c and the starting gear teeth 4453b1. It mainly includes gear teeth 4453b2.

図32(b)に示すように、反転ギア4453は、始動ギア歯4453b1の歯幅が最大とされ、始動ギア歯4453b1から遠ざかるにつれて中間ギア歯4453b2の歯幅が短縮される態様で形成される。その短縮の度合い(図32(b)における各ギア歯の上端を結ぶ線の傾き)が、二層ギア4452の分断ギア歯4452bの歯幅の短縮の度合い(図31(b)における各ギア歯の上端を結ぶ線の傾き)に比較して緩やかに形成される。 As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the reversing gear 4453 is formed in such a manner that the tooth width of the starting gear tooth 4453b1 is maximized and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 is shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4453b1 is increased. .. The degree of shortening (the inclination of the line connecting the upper ends of each gear tooth in FIG. 32 (b)) is the degree of shortening of the tooth width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b of the two-layer gear 4452 (each gear tooth in FIG. 31 (b)). It is formed more gently than the slope of the line connecting the upper ends of.

図32(c)に示すように、反転ギア4453の各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2は、一対の係合突状受け部453dから最も遠ざかって形成される中間ギア歯4453b2を除いて、幅方向の端面(図32(b)上端面)が係合突状受け部側に下降傾斜して形成される。これにより、反転ギア4453と二層ギア4452との歯合開始時の軸方向への相対的な位置ずれの許容量を大きく保持しつつ、位置ずれの修正をより急激におこなうことができる。 As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 have end faces in the width direction except for the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging protrusions 453d. (Upper end surface of FIG. 32B) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the engaging protrusion receiving portion side. As a result, it is possible to correct the misalignment more rapidly while maintaining a large allowable amount of the relative misalignment in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452.

即ち、反転ギア4453の各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2が二層ギア4452に歯合される場合、各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2は係合突状受け部側(歯幅が最短側、図32(c)右側)から歯合され始める。そのため、例えば、各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2の歯幅方向の寸法が歯幅最長側(図32(c)左側)で一定とされる場合に比較して、歯合開始時の板状部4452eと各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2との間の間隔(遊び)を大きく確保することができる。従って、反転ギア4453と二層ギア4452との歯合開始時の軸方向への位置ずれの許容量を大きく確保することができる。 That is, when each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 is meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 is on the engaging protrusion receiving portion side (the tooth width is the shortest side, FIG. 32 (c)). From the right side), the teeth start to fit. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the dimensions of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 in the tooth width direction are constant on the longest tooth width side (left side in FIG. 32C), the plate-shaped portion 4452e at the start of tooth engagement A large distance (play) between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large allowable amount of axial misalignment at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452.

一方、反転ギア4453の各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2と二層ギア4452との歯合が進むと、各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2の歯幅最長側(図32(c)左側)が二層ギア4452の板状部4452eの背面側(図31(b)下方)へ入り込む。これにより、例えば、各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2の歯幅方向の寸法が歯幅最短側(図32(c)右側)で一定とされる場合に比較して、歯合解除(互いの各歯が逃げる時)直前の板状部4452eと各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2との間の間隔(遊び)を小さくすることができる。 On the other hand, when the meshing of the gear teeth 4453b1, 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 progresses, the longest tooth width side of each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 (left side in FIG. 32C) is the double-layer gear 4452. It enters the back side (lower side of FIG. 31B) of the plate-shaped portion 4452e. As a result, for example, as compared with the case where the dimensions of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 in the tooth width direction are constant on the shortest tooth width side (right side in FIG. (When escaping) The distance (play) between the plate-shaped portion 4452e immediately before and each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be reduced.

従って、各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2が二層ギア4452と噛み合う際に、ギア歯4453b1,4453b2ごとの噛み合い始めから噛み合い解除までの間で、板状部4452eと各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2との間の間隔(遊び)を小さくすることができる。これにより反転ギア4453と二層ギア4452との、位置ずれの修正をより急激におこなうことができる。 Therefore, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 mesh with the two-layer gear 4452, between the plate-shaped portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1, 4453b2 between the start of meshing of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 and the disengagement. The interval (play) can be reduced. As a result, the misalignment between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 can be corrected more rapidly.

また、本実施形態では、板状部4452eの傾斜(図31(b)参照)が反転ギア4453の各ギア歯4453b1,4453b2の傾斜(図32(c)参照)と逆向きに形成されるので、上述した反転ギア4453と二層ギア4452との歯合開始時の軸方向への位置ずれの許容量を大きく保持しつつ位置ずれの修正をより急激にする効果を向上させることができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the plate-shaped portion 4452e (see FIG. 31B) is formed in the opposite direction to the inclination of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 (see FIG. 32C). It is possible to improve the effect of making the correction of the misalignment more rapidly while maintaining a large allowable amount of the misalignment in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 described above.

なお、一対の係合突状受け部453dから最も遠ざかって形成される中間ギア歯4453b2の幅方向の端面(図32(b)上端面)は反転ギア4453の回転軸に垂直な平面で形成される。 The widthwise end surface (upper end surface of FIG. 32B) of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging protrusion receiving portions 453d is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the reversing gear 4453. NS.

次いで、図33から図35を参照して、第5実施形態における第2ギア群5450について説明する。 Next, the second gear group 5450 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

第1実施形態では、二層ギア452が単一の樹脂材料のみから形成される場合を説明したが、第5実施形態における二層ギア5452は、始動ギア歯5452b1の内部に磁性材料が埋設される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is formed of only a single resin material has been described, but in the two-layer gear 5452 according to the fifth embodiment, a magnetic material is embedded inside the starting gear teeth 5452b1. NS. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図33は、二層ギア5452の正面図である。図33に示すように、二層ギア5452は、始動ギア歯5452b1に回転軸と平行な方向に沿って埋め込み孔5452gが穿設され、その埋め込み孔5452gに埋め込み部材5452hが埋設される。 FIG. 33 is a front view of the two-layer gear 5452. As shown in FIG. 33, in the two-layer gear 5452, an embedding hole 5452g is formed in the starting gear tooth 5452b1 along a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and an embedding member 5452h is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g.

埋め込み孔5452gは、断面円径の有底孔形状に形成され、埋め込み部材5452hは、埋め込み孔5452gの直径と同等か若干大きな直径の円柱形状に形成される。これにより、埋め込み部材5452hは埋め込み孔5452gに嵌め込み固定される。 The embedding hole 5452g is formed in a bottomed hole shape having a circular cross-sectional diameter, and the embedding member 5452h is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the embedding hole 5452g. As a result, the embedding member 5452h is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5452g.

埋め込み部材5452hは、金属磁性材料やプラスチック磁性材料から形成される円柱形状の部材であって、軸に沿った平面でS極とN極とが二分割される。なお、図33から図35において、埋め込み部材5452hの黒塗り側がN極で、その反対側がS極でそれぞれ形成される。 The embedded member 5452h is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the south pole and the north pole are divided into two in a plane along the axis. In FIGS. 33 to 35, the black-painted side of the embedded member 5452h is formed by the north pole, and the opposite side is formed by the south pole.

図34は、第2ギア群5450の部分正面図である。なお、図34は、二層ギア5452の始動ギア歯5452b1が反転ギア5453の係合突状受け部453dに当接する直前の状態が図示される。また、二層ギア5452の円板部452c及びギア歯452aと伝達ギア451とが想像線で図示される。 FIG. 34 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. Note that FIG. 34 shows a state immediately before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 abuts on the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453. Further, the disk portion 452c of the two-layer gear 5452, the gear teeth 452a, and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

図34に示すように、反転ギア5453は、始動ギア歯5453b1に軸と平行な方向に沿って埋め込み孔5453fが穿設され、その埋め込み孔5453fに埋め込み部材5453gが埋設される。これにより、埋め込み部材5453gは埋め込み孔5453fに嵌め込み固定される。 As shown in FIG. 34, in the reversing gear 5453, an embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 along a direction parallel to the axis, and an embedding member 5453g is embedded in the embedding hole 5453f. As a result, the embedding member 5453g is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5453f.

埋め込み部材5453gは、金属磁性材料やプラスチック磁性材料から形成される円柱形状の部材であって、軸に沿った平面でS極とN極とが二分割される。 The embedded member 5453g is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the south pole and the north pole are divided into two in a plane along the axis.

図34に示すように、磁極を二分割する平面は、径方向に沿って形成されると共に軸を通る平面とされ、始動ギア歯5452b1,5453b1は向かい合う側に反対の極を向けて埋め込まれる。即ち、始動ギア歯5452b1は歯合時に始動ギア歯5453b1と対向する側(図34上側)にN極が形成され、始動ギア歯5453b1は歯合時に始動ギア歯5452b1と対向する側(図34下側)にS極が形成される。これにより、二層ギア5452と反転ギア5453との歯合において、歯合ギア歯5452b1,5453b1を引きつけ合わせる磁力が発生する。 As shown in FIG. 34, the plane that divides the magnetic pole into two is formed along the radial direction and is a plane that passes through the axis, and the starting gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 are embedded so that the opposite poles face each other. That is, the starting gear tooth 5452b1 has an N pole formed on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5453b1 at the time of meshing (upper side in FIG. 34), and the starting gear tooth 5453b1 is on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5452b1 at the time of meshing (lower part of FIG. 34). The south pole is formed on the side). As a result, in the meshing of the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453, a magnetic force that attracts the meshing gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 is generated.

即ち、図34に示す状態から二層ギア5452が図34反時計回りに回転されるにつれて埋め込み部材5452h,5453gの距離が縮まるので間に発生する磁力は大きくなり、始動ギア歯5453b1が始動ギア歯5452b1に引きつけられる。これにより、二層ギア5452の始動ギア歯5452b1と反転ギア5453の係合突状受け部453dとが当接する前に反転ギア5453が磁力に引かれて回転される。そのため、静止状態の反転ギア5453に始動ギア歯5452b1が当接する場合に比較して、当接時の衝撃や当接時に二層ギア5452及び反転ギア5453が受ける荷重を緩和することができる。 That is, as the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 34 from the state shown in FIG. 34, the distance between the embedded members 5452h and 5453g decreases, so that the magnetic force generated between them increases, and the starting gear tooth 5453b1 becomes the starting gear tooth. Attracted to 5452b1. As a result, the reversing gear 5453 is attracted by the magnetic force and rotated before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453 come into contact with each other. Therefore, as compared with the case where the starting gear tooth 5452b1 comes into contact with the stationary reversing gear 5453, the impact at the time of contact and the load received by the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 at the time of contact can be relaxed.

図35は、第2ギア群5450の部分正面図である。なお、図35は、図34の状態から、所定量だけ二層ギア5452が図35反時計回りに回転された状態が図示される。また、二層ギア5452の円板部452c及びギア歯452aと伝達ギア451とが想像線で図示される。 FIG. 35 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. Note that FIG. 35 shows a state in which the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 35 by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 34. Further, the disk portion 452c of the two-layer gear 5452, the gear teeth 452a, and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

図35に示すように、二層ギア5452の回転方向前方において二層ギア5452と反転ギア5453との間に隙間が形成される。これにより、二層ギア5452と反転ギア5453との当接開始時だけでなく、二層ギア5452と反転ギア5453とが歯合により回転される間において係合突状受け部453dに加えられる荷重を抑制することができる。従って、係合突状受け部453dに必要な強度を低くすることができ、係合突状受け部453dの設計自由度を向上させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 35, a gap is formed between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 in front of the two-layer gear 5452 in the rotation direction. As a result, the load applied to the engaging protrusion 453d not only at the start of contact between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 but also while the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 are rotated by the teeth. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the strength required for the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d can be lowered, and the degree of freedom in designing the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d can be improved.

次いで、図36及び図37を参照して、第6実施形態における第2ギア群6450について説明する。 Next, the second gear group 6450 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

第1実施形態では、二層ギア452が一体で形成される場合を説明したが、第6実施形態における二層ギア6452は、始動ギア歯452b1が省略されると共に、中間ギア歯452b2とは別体の異形ギア歯部材6452gを備えて構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is integrally formed has been described, but the two-layer gear 6452 in the sixth embodiment has the starting gear tooth 452b1 omitted and is separate from the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. It is configured to include 6452 g of deformed gear tooth members of the body. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図36は、二層ギア6452の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図36では、異形ギア歯部材6452gが円板部452cから取り外された状態が図示される。本実施形態では異形ギア歯部材6452gが鉄などの金属材料から形成されることで、二層ギア6452の異形ギア歯部材6452g以外の部分であって樹脂材料から一体に形成される部分に比較して異形ギア歯部材6452gの剛性が高くされる。また、部分的に金属材料とすることで、二層ギア6452全体を金属材料で形成する場合に比較して軽量化でき、二層ギア6452を回転させるために必要な駆動力を抑制することができる。 FIG. 36 is a front exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear 6452. Note that FIG. 36 shows a state in which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is removed from the disk portion 452c. In the present embodiment, since the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is formed of a metal material such as iron, it is compared with a portion of the double-layer gear 6452 other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g which is integrally formed of the resin material. Therefore, the rigidity of the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is increased. Further, by partially using a metal material, the weight can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire two-layer gear 6452 is made of a metal material, and the driving force required to rotate the two-layer gear 6452 can be suppressed. can.

図36に示すように、二層ギア6452は、一対の異形ギア歯部材6452gと、その異形ギア歯部材6452gが挿通される孔であって円板部452cに穿設される差し込み孔6452c1と、第1窪み部452b3と第2窪み部452b4との間に形成される切り欠きであって異形ギア歯部材6452gのギア歯本体部6452g1が挟み込まれるギア歯側切り欠き6452b5と、摺動壁部452dに形成される切り欠きであって異形ギア歯部材6452gの摺動受け部6452g3が挟み込まれる摺動部切り欠き6452d1と、摺動壁部452dの両端部にL字の鉤形状に形成される鉤型受け部6452d2と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 36, the two-layer gear 6452 has a pair of deformed gear tooth members 6452 g and an insertion hole 6452c1 which is a hole through which the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is inserted and is formed in the disk portion 452c. A notch formed between the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4, the gear tooth side notch 6452b5 in which the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and the sliding wall portion 452d. A sliding portion notch 6452d1 in which a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 of a deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and a hook formed in an L-shaped hook shape at both ends of a sliding wall portion 452d. Mainly includes a mold receiving portion 6452d2.

異形ギア歯部材6452gは、第1実施形態における始動ギア歯452b1を歯底側に延長した形状からなるギア歯本体部6452g1と、そのギア歯本体部6452g1の歯先の反対側の端部から背面側に突設される円柱状の差し込みピン6452g2と、組立状態(図37参照)において側面が摺動壁部452dの一部を形成する摺動受け部6452g3と、ギア歯本体部6452g1と摺動受け部6452g3とを連結する連結部6452g4と、を主に備える。 The deformed gear tooth member 6452g includes a gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 having a shape in which the starting gear tooth 452b1 in the first embodiment is extended toward the tooth bottom side, and the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 from the end opposite to the tooth tip to the back surface. A columnar insertion pin 6452g2 projecting to the side, a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 whose side surface forms a part of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37), and a gear tooth body portion 6452g1 sliding. It mainly includes a connecting portion 6452g4 that connects the receiving portion 6452g3.

ギア歯本体部6452g1は、ギア歯側切り欠き6452b5に挟まれる部分の歯厚がギア歯側切り欠き6452b5の寸法と同等か若干大きく形成される。これにより、組立状態(図37参照)でギア歯本体部6452g1がギア歯側切り欠き6452b5に挟持される。 The gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is formed so that the tooth thickness of the portion sandwiched by the gear tooth side notch 6452b5 is equal to or slightly larger than the dimension of the gear tooth side notch 6452b5. As a result, the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

摺動受け部6452g3は組立状態(図37参照)で外周面が摺動壁部452dの外周面と滑らかにつながる態様で形成される。連結部6452g4の外周面は窪み底壁部452eと組立状態(図37参照)で若干の間隔をあけて対向配置される。 The sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is formed in such a manner that the outer peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37). The outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 is arranged so as to face the recessed bottom wall portion 452e at a slight interval in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

組立状態(図37参照)において、差し込みピン6452g2が差し込み孔6452c1に挿通されると共にギア歯本体部6452g1がギア歯側切り欠き6452b5に挟まれる。更に、連結部6452g4が第2窪み部452b4の窪み底壁部452eと若干の間隔をあけて対向配置され、摺動受け部6452g3の内周側が鉤型受け部6452d2に当接される。これにより、ギア歯本体部6452g1が反転ギア453に当接されることで差し込み孔6452c1を軸に回転する回転量を抑制することができる。 In the assembled state (see FIG. 37), the insertion pin 6452g2 is inserted into the insertion hole 6452c1 and the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5. Further, the connecting portion 6452g4 is arranged to face the recessed bottom wall portion 452e of the second recessed portion 452b4 with a slight gap, and the inner peripheral side of the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is brought into contact with the hook type receiving portion 6452d2. As a result, the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is brought into contact with the reversing gear 453, so that the amount of rotation that rotates about the insertion hole 6452c1 can be suppressed.

図37は、二層ギア6452及び反転ギア453の正面図である。なお、図37では、異形ギア歯部材6452gのギア歯本体部6452g1が反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dに当接された状態が図示されると共に、円板部452cが想像線で図示される。 FIG. 37 is a front view of the two-layer gear 6452 and the reversing gear 453. In FIG. 37, a state in which the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is in contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 is shown, and the disk portion 452c is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

図37に示すように、異形ギア歯部材6452gが反転ギア453から加えられる荷重を反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dに受けさせることができる。 As shown in FIG. 37, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453 on the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453.

即ち、異形ギア歯部材6452gを金属材料から形成したとしても、その異形ギア歯部材6452gを支持する部分は樹脂材料から形成される。また、二層ギア6452は成型時のヒケの発生を防ぐため径方向の厚さが略一定に形成されるので剛性が十分ではない。そのため、二層ギア6452と反転ギア453とが当接される場合に生じる荷重により、異形ギア歯部材6452gが移動する(差し込み孔6452c1を軸に回転する)と、異形ギア歯部材6452gから押圧力を受ける異形ギア歯部材6452g以外の部分(窪み底壁部452e等)が破損する恐れがある。 That is, even if the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is formed of a metal material, the portion supporting the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is formed of a resin material. Further, the double-layer gear 6452 is not sufficiently rigid because the thickness in the radial direction is formed to be substantially constant in order to prevent the occurrence of sink marks during molding. Therefore, when the deformed gear tooth member 6452g moves (rotates around the insertion hole 6452c1) due to the load generated when the two-layer gear 6452 and the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other, the pressing force is applied from the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. There is a risk that parts other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g (such as the recessed bottom wall portion 452e) will be damaged.

一方、本実施形態では、異形ギア歯部材6452gが、連結部6452g4の外周面と窪み底壁部452eとの間に形成される若干の間隔を埋める方向に移動され始める(差し込み孔6452c1を軸に回転され始める)と、反転ギア453の円弧状凹部453cに異形ギア歯部材6452gの摺動受け部6452g3が押しつけられる。円弧状凹部453cは径方向の厚みが十分に確保され剛性の大きい部分である。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g starts to move in a direction to fill a slight gap formed between the outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e (with the insertion hole 6452c1 as the axis). When it starts to rotate), the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is pressed against the arcuate concave portion 453c of the reversing gear 453. The arcuate recess 453c is a portion having a sufficient radial thickness and high rigidity.

これにより、異形ギア歯部材6452gが反転ギア453から加えられる荷重を反転ギア453の係合突状受け部453dに受けさせることができ、二層ギア6452の部分であって異形ギア歯部材6452g以外の部分(窪み底壁部452e等)に加えられる荷重を抑制することができる。また、反転ギア453の円弧状凹部453cを利用して異形ギア歯部材6452gを支えることができる。 As a result, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453, which is a portion of the double-layer gear 6452 other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. The load applied to the portion (recessed bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) can be suppressed. Further, the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453 can be used to support the deformed gear tooth member 6452g.

次いで、図38から図45を参照して、第7実施形態における複合動作ユニット7400について説明する。 Next, the combined operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45.

第1実施形態では、半月部材460が回転する時のスライド部材420の位置が一通りに限定される場合を説明したが、第7実施形態における複合動作ユニット7400は、半月部材460が回転する時のスライド部材420の位置を少なくとも2通り形成可能である。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 In the first embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the half-moon member 460 rotates is limited to one way, but the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment describes the case where the half-moon member 460 rotates. At least two positions of the slide member 420 can be formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図38(a)から図38(c)は、二層ギア7452の背面図である。なお、図38(a)では、二層ギア7452の回転が停止される静止状態が図示され、図38(b)では、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vが境界速度Vbより低速な第1回転速度V1である状態が図示され、図38(c)では、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vが境界速度Vbより高速な第2回転速度V2である状態が図示される。 38 (a) to 38 (c) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452. Note that FIG. 38 (a) shows a stationary state in which the rotation of the double-layer gear 7452 is stopped, and FIG. 38 (b) shows the first rotation in which the rotation speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 is lower than the boundary speed Vb. The state of the speed V1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38 (c), the state in which the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is the second rotation speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb is shown.

なお、理解を容易にするために、ギア歯452aおよび円板部452cの図示が省略される。これは、以降の図面でも同様である。また、境界速度Vbとは、突出ギア部材7452eが没入状態から張出状態へ切り替えられる時の二層ギア7452の回転速度Vを意味する。 For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. This also applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the boundary speed Vb means the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 when the protruding gear member 7452e is switched from the immersed state to the extended state.

図38に示すように、二層ギア7452は、回転軸から径方向外側へ向けて形成される断面矩形の溝である案内溝7452dと、その案内溝7452dの溝幅より若干小さな幅で形成されると共に先端がギア歯形状に形成される突出ギア部材7452eと、その突出ギア部材7452eと二層ギア7452の回転軸とを連結する付勢バネ7452fと、を主に備えて構成される。 As shown in FIG. 38, the two-layer gear 7452 is formed with a guide groove 7452d, which is a groove having a rectangular cross section formed from the rotation axis toward the outside in the radial direction, and a width slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 7452d. It is mainly composed of a protruding gear member 7452e whose tip is formed in a gear tooth shape, and an urging spring 7452f that connects the protruding gear member 7452e and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 7452.

案内溝7452dは、二層ギア7452の外周を円周方向に3等分する配置で3箇所形成され、それぞれの案内溝7452dに突出ギア部材7452eおよび付勢バネ7452fが配設される。また、各案内溝7452dを結ぶ二層ギア7452の外周面に中間ギア歯452b2が形成される。 The guide groove 7452d is formed at three locations so as to divide the outer circumference of the two-layer gear 7452 into three equal parts in the circumferential direction, and the protruding gear member 7452e and the urging spring 7452f are arranged in each guide groove 7452d. Further, intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 7452 connecting the guide grooves 7452d.

突出ギア部材7452eは、各突出ギア部材7452e1〜7452e3がそれぞれ同じ質量で形成され、各付勢バネ7452fはそれぞれ同一のバネ定数で形成される。 In the protruding gear member 7452e, each protruding gear member 7452e1 to 7452e3 is formed with the same mass, and each urging spring 7452f is formed with the same spring constant.

図38(a)に示すように、二層ギア7452の停止状態において、突出ギア部材7452eは中間ギア歯452b2の歯底を連ねた面よりも回転軸側へ没入する。このとき、不正バネ7452fは自然長とされる。 As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the stopped state of the two-layer gear 7452, the protruding gear member 7452e is immersed in the rotation shaft side of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth bottoms are connected. At this time, the illegal spring 7452f has a natural length.

図38(b)に示すように、二層ギア7452が境界速度Vbより低速な第1回転速度V1で回転される場合、突出ギア部材7452eを二層ギア7452の径方向外側へ移動させようとする力が生じる。この力と、付勢バネ7452fによる付勢力とが釣り合う位置まで突出ギア部材7452eが張出される。その張り出した状態において、突出ギア部材7452eは中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた面よりも回転軸側に位置される(没入状態)。 As shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 which is lower than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452. Power is generated. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the urging force of the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is positioned on the rotation axis side of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (immersive state).

そのため、後述するように、二層ギア7452が第1回転速度V1で回転される場合には、二層ギア7452は反転ギア7453(図42参照)と歯合開始されない。即ち、二層ギア7452は反転ギア7453に対して空回りする。 Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1, the two-layer gear 7452 does not start meshing with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 42). That is, the two-layer gear 7452 runs idle with respect to the reversing gear 7453.

図38(c)に示すように、二層ギア7452が境界速度Vbより高速な第2回転速度V2で回転される場合、突出ギア部材7452eを二層ギア7452の径方向外側へ移動させようとする力が生じる。この力と、付勢バネ7452fによる付勢力とが釣り合う位置まで突出ギア部材7452eが張出される。その張り出した状態において、突出ギア部材7452eは中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた面よりも径方向外側に張り出される(張出状態)。 As shown in FIG. 38 (c), when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at a second rotation speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the double-layer gear 7452. Power is generated. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the urging force of the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e projects radially outward from the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (overhanging state).

そのため、後述するように、二層ギア7452が第2回転速度V2で回転される場合には、二層ギア7452の突出ギア部材7452eが反転ギア7453(図39参照)に当接することで、二層ギア7452が反転ギア7453に歯合され始める。 Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 7452 abuts on the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39). The layer gear 7452 begins to mesh with the reversing gear 7453.

即ち、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vを境界速度Vbに対して高速とするか、低速とするかで、二層ギア7452が反転ギア7453(図39参照)と歯合し始めるか否かを選択することができる。そのため、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vを回転の途中で変化させることで(スライド部材420(図40参照)の移動速度を移動の途中で変化させることで)、半月部材460(図40参照)が回転される時のスライド部材420の配置のバリエーションを複数通り用意することができる。 That is, whether or not the two-layer gear 7452 starts to mesh with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39) depending on whether the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is higher or lower than the boundary speed Vb. You can choose. Therefore, by changing the rotation speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 in the middle of rotation (by changing the moving speed of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40) in the middle of movement), the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 40). It is possible to prepare a plurality of variations in the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the slide member 420 is rotated.

次いで、図39から図44を参照して、半月部材460が回転され始める時のスライド部材420の配置のバリエーションについて説明する。まず、図39から図41を参照して、移動部材420の退避位置からの移動開始直後から主動ギア7452が第2回転速度V2で回転される場合(第1速度パターン)を説明する。 Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44, variations in the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 starts to rotate will be described. First, a case where the main gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position (first speed pattern) will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

図39(a)から図39(e)は、二層ギア7452及び反転ギア7453の回転を時系列で図示した二層ギア7452及び反転ギア7453の背面図であり、図40(a)、図40(b)、図41(a)及び図41(b)は、スライド部材420のスライド移動および半月部材460の姿勢変化を時系列で図示した複合動作ユニット7400の正面図である。なお、理解を容易にするために、図39では、ギア歯452aおよび円板部452cの図示が省略され、図40及び図41では締結板部471及び駆動モータ472の図示が省略される。 39 (a) to 39 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in which the rotations of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 are illustrated in chronological order. 40 (b), FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the half moon member 460 in chronological order. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disc portion 452c are omitted in FIG. 39, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are omitted in FIGS. 40 and 41.

なお、図39(a)及び図40(a)、図39(b)及び図40(b)、図39(c)及び図41(a)、そして図39(d)及び図41(b)がそれぞれ略同時点の図であり、互いに対応関係にある。また、図39では、二層ギア7452の回転方向が矢印で図示され、図39に示すように、円弧状凹部453cは二層ギア7452の中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた円に外接される態様で形成される。 39 (a) and 40 (a), 39 (b) and 40 (b), 39 (c) and 41 (a), and 39 (d) and 41 (b). Are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, and they correspond to each other. Further, in FIG. 39, the rotation direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is illustrated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 39, the arcuate recess 453c is circumscribed by a circle connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452. It is formed in such a manner.

図39(a)に示すように、二層ギア7452はスライド部材420の移動開始直後(図40(a)参照)から第2回転速度V2で回転され、二層ギア7452が所定量回転されると第1突出ギア部材7452e1が反転ギア7453の係合突状受け部453dに当接される(図39(b)参照)。これにより、反転ギア7453が回転され始め、半月部材460が姿勢変化し始める(図40(b)参照)。 As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), and the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount. And the first protruding gear member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B). As a result, the reversing gear 7453 begins to rotate, and the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 40 (b)).

反転ギア7453が回転され始めた後、二層ギア7452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア7453の中間ギア歯453b2とが噛み合うことで、反転ギア7453の回転が継続されると共に半月部材460の姿勢変化が継続される(図39(c)及び図41(a)参照)。 After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other to continue the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and change the posture of the half moon member 460. Is continued (see FIGS. 39 (c) and 41 (a)).

二層ギア7452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア7453の中間ギア歯453b2とが噛み合ったあと、更に二層ギア7452が回転されることで、反転ギア7453の円弧状凹部453cが再度二層ギア7452と外接され(図39(d)参照)、反転ギア7453の回転が停止されると共にスライド部材420に対する半月部材460の姿勢が固定される(図41(b)参照)。 After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the double-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is re-engaged with the double-layer gear 7452. (See FIG. 39 (d)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the half-moon member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 41 (b)).

その後、スライド部材420がスライド移動し終わる(図26(b)参照)まで二層ギア7452は回転され、スライド部材420が停止されることで回転を停止する(図39(e)参照)。その後、突出ギア部材7452eが付勢バネ7452fの付勢力で二層ギア7452の径方向内側へ移動される。 After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26 (b)), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped (see FIG. 39 (e)). After that, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved inward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 by the urging force of the urging spring 7452f.

ここで、図39(d)から図39(e)の状態まで二層ギア7452が回転される場合には、第3突出部材7452e3及び第1突出部材7452e1が係合突状受け部453dに当接し、二層ギア7452と反転ギア7453とが再度噛み合う恐れがある。 Here, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated from the state of FIGS. 39 (d) to 39 (e), the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 hit the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d. There is a risk that the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 will come into contact with each other and mesh again.

これに対し、本実施形態では、係合突状受け部453dの一端(図39(e)上側の端)に円弧状の面取り部7453eが形成される。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an arc-shaped chamfered portion 7453e is formed at one end (the upper end in FIG. 39E) of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d.

第3突出部材7452e3及び第1突出部材7452e1が面取り部7453eに当接されると、第3突出部材7452e3及び第1突出部材7452e1に二層ギア7452の径方向内側へ向く力が作用される。これにより、第3突出部材7452e3及び第1突出部材7452e1が反転ギア745と噛み合う前に、第3突出部材7452e3及び第1突出部材7452e1をそれぞれ没入状態にすることができる。従って、二層ギア7452と反転ギア7453とが再度噛み合うことを防止することができる。 When the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the chamfered portion 7453e, a force acting inward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is applied to the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1. As a result, the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 can be immersed in the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 before they mesh with the reversing gear 745. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 from meshing again.

次いで、図42から図44を参照して、移動部材420の退避位置からの移動開始直後は二層ギア7452が第1回転速度V1で回転され、回転の途中で二層ギア7452が第2回転速度V2で回転される(回転速度Vが変化される)場合(第2速度パターン)を説明する。 Next, referring to FIGS. 42 to 44, immediately after the start of movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1, and the two-layer gear 7452 is second-rotated during the rotation. The case where the rotation speed V2 is rotated (the rotation speed V is changed) (second speed pattern) will be described.

図42(a)から図42(e)は、二層ギア7452及び反転ギア7453の回転を時系列で図示した二層ギア7452及び反転ギア7453の背面図であり、図43(a)、図43(b)、図44(a)及び図44(b)は、スライド部材420のスライド移動および半月部材460の姿勢変化を時系列で図示した複合動作ユニット7400の正面図である。なお、理解を容易にするために、図42では、ギア歯452aおよび円板部452cの図示が省略され、図43及び図44では締結板部471及び駆動モータ472の図示が省略される。 42 (a) to 42 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in which the rotations of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 are illustrated in chronological order. 43 (b), FIG. 44 (a) and FIG. 44 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the half moon member 460 in chronological order. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disc portion 452c are omitted in FIG. 42, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are omitted in FIGS. 43 and 44.

なお、図42(a)及び上述した図40(a)、図42(b)及び図43(a)、図42(c)及び図43(b)、図42(d)及び図44(a)、そして図42(e)及び図44(b)がそれぞれ略同時点の図であり、互いに対応関係にある。また、図42では、二層ギア7452の回転方向が矢印で図示され、図42(a)に示すように、円弧状凹部453cは二層ギア7452の中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた円に外接される態様で形成される。 It should be noted that FIG. 42 (a) and the above-mentioned FIGS. 40 (a), 42 (b) and 43 (a), 42 (c) and 43 (b), 42 (d) and 44 (a). ), And FIGS. 42 (e) and 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, and are in a corresponding relationship with each other. Further, in FIG. 42, the rotation direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is illustrated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the arcuate recess 453c is a circle in which the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 are connected. It is formed in a manner circumscribing to.

図42(a)に示すように、二層ギア7452はスライド部材420の移動開始直後(図40(a)参照)では第1回転速度V1で回転されるため、突出ギア部材7452eが没入状態を形成する。 As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), so that the protruding gear member 7452e is immersed. Form.

そのため、二層ギア7452が所定量回転されても第1突出ギア部材7452e1が反転ギア7453の係合突状受け部453dに当接されないため、二層ギア7452と反転ギア7453との歯合は開始されない(図42(b)参照)。これにより、半月部材460の姿勢が維持されたままスライド部材420が移動される(図43(a)参照)。 Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453, so that the mesh between the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 is not good. Not started (see FIG. 42 (b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while maintaining the posture of the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 43 (a)).

二層ギア7452が回転を継続され、第2突出ギア部材7452e2が反転ギア7453の係合突状受け部453dに近接するまでに、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vが第2回転速度V2に変更される。これにより、突出ギア部材7452eが張出状態を形成し(図42(c)参照)、第2突出ギア部材7452e2が係合突状受け部453dに当接されることで反転ギア7453が回転され始めると共に半月部材460が姿勢変化し始める(図43(b)参照)。 The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 until the two-layer gear 7452 continues to rotate and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 approaches the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453. Will be done. As a result, the protruding gear member 7452e forms an overhanging state (see FIG. 42C), and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is brought into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d to rotate the reversing gear 7453. At the same time, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 43 (b)).

反転ギア7453が回転され始めた後、二層ギア7452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア7453の中間ギア歯453b2とが噛み合うことで、反転ギア7453の回転が継続されると共に半月部材460の姿勢変化が継続される(図42(d)及び図44(a)参照)。 After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other to continue the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and change the posture of the half moon member 460. Is continued (see FIGS. 42 (d) and 44 (a)).

二層ギア7452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア7453の中間ギア歯453b2とが噛み合ったあと、更に二層ギア7452が回転されることで、反転ギア7453の円弧状凹部453cが再度二層ギア7452と外接され(図42(e)参照)、反転ギア7453の回転が停止されると共にスライド部材420に対する半月部材460の姿勢が固定される(図44(b)参照)。 After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the double-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is re-engaged with the double-layer gear 7452. (See FIG. 42 (e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the crescent member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 44 (b)).

その後、スライド部材420がスライド移動し終わる(図26(b)参照)まで二層ギア7452は回転され、スライド部材420が停止されることで回転を停止する。 After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the slide member 420 is stopped to stop the rotation.

なお、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vとスライド部材420の移動速度とは比例関係にあるので、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vを変化させることは駆動モータ472の回転速度を変化させることで容易に行うことができる。 Since the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 and the moving speed of the slide member 420 are in a proportional relationship, it is easy to change the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 by changing the rotation speed of the drive motor 472. Can be done.

このように、本実施形態によれば、スライド部材420が退避位置から張出位置までスライド移動される間において半月部材460が回転され始める時の、スライド部材420の位置を少なくとも2通りで変更することができる。即ち、回転開始時から二層ギア7452が第2回転速度V2で回転される場合(図39から図41まで参照)に比較して、回転途中で第1回転速度V1から第2回転速度V2に変化される場合(図42から図44まで参照)に、半月部材460の回転する時のスライド部材420の配置を中央側(上下方向中心側)に寄せることができる(図40(b)及び図43(b)参照)。これにより、演出のバリエーションを増やすことができる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the overhanging position. be able to. That is, as compared with the case where the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 from the start of rotation (see FIGS. 39 to 41), the first rotation speed V1 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 during the rotation. When changed (see FIGS. 42 to 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 rotates can be moved toward the center side (center side in the vertical direction) (FIGS. 40 (b) and FIG. 43 (b)). This makes it possible to increase the variation of the production.

次いで、図45を参照して、上述した第1速度パターン及び第2速度パターンの代表例について説明する。図45は、二層ギア7452の速度変化を示すグラフである。なお、図45において、横軸は、退避位置(P=0)から張出位置(P=Pmax)の間におけるスライド部材420の位置(P)が示され、縦軸は、スライド部材420のスライド移動時に回転される二層ギア7452の回転速度Vが示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 45, typical examples of the first speed pattern and the second speed pattern described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a graph showing the speed change of the two-layer gear 7452. In FIG. 45, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the overhanging position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis represents the slide of the slide member 420. The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 that is rotated during movement is shown.

なお、図45の横軸において、第1位置P1は、第1突出ギア部材7452e1が反転ギア7453に初めに対向配置される位置(図39(b)参照)を意味し、第2位置P2は、第2突出ギア部材7452e2が反転ギア7453に初めに対向配置される位置(図42(c)を意味する。実線は上述した第1速度パターンが示され、破線は上述した第2速度パターンが示される。 In the horizontal axis of FIG. 45, the first position P1 means the position where the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B), and the second position P2 is , The position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (FIG. 42 (c). The solid line shows the above-mentioned first speed pattern, and the broken line shows the above-mentioned second speed pattern. Shown.

上述したとおり、本実施形態では、第1速度パターンで二層ギア7452が回転される場合には、半月部材460はスライド部材420が第1位置P1に到達した直後に姿勢変化され始める。これに対し、第2速度パターンで二層ギア7452が回転される場合には、半月部材460はスライド部材420が第2位置P2に到達した直後に姿勢変化され始める。 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the first speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 starts to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the second speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

即ち、スライド部材420のスライド移動中に二層ギア7452の回転速度Vを変えることにより、半月部材460の姿勢変化がされ始める時のスライド部材420の位置を変化させることができる。従って、スライド部材420および半月部材460の演出のバリエーションを増やすことができる。 That is, by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 during the slide movement of the slide member 420, the position of the slide member 420 when the posture of the half-moon member 460 begins to change can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460.

次いで、図46から図48を参照して、第8実施形態における複合動作ユニット8400について説明する。 Next, the combined operation unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

第7実施形態では、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vを回転の途中で変更することで半月部材460が回転する時のスライド部材420の位置を変更する場合を説明したが、第8実施形態における複合動作ユニット8400は、半月部材460が回転する時のスライド部材420の位置を二層ギア8452の回転速度は等速に維持したまま変更可能に形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 In the seventh embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 rotates is changed by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 in the middle of rotation has been described. The composite operation unit 8400 is formed so that the position of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 rotates can be changed while the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 8452 is maintained at a constant speed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図46(a)及び図46(b)は、二層ギア8452の背面図である。なお、図46(a)では、二層ギア8452が分離回転速度V3で回転される状態が図示され、図46(b)では、二層ギア8452が共同回転速度V4で回転される状態が図示される。二層ギア8452の回転が停止される静止状態は図38(a)と同様なので、説明を省略する。 46 (a) and 46 (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452. Note that FIG. 46 (a) shows a state in which the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a separate rotation speed V3, and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a joint rotation speed V4. Will be done. Since the stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 is stopped is the same as in FIG. 38 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

なお、理解を容易にするために、ギア歯452aおよび円板部452cの図示が省略される。これは、以降の図面でも同様である。また、分離回転速度V3とは、第1突出ギア部材7452e1は没入状態を形成する一方で第2突出ギア部材7452e2は張出状態を形成する回転速度を意味し、共同回転速度V4とは、第1突出ギア部材7452e1及び第2突出ギア部材7452e2が共に張出状態を形成する回転速度を意味する。 For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. This also applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the separated rotation speed V3 means a rotation speed at which the first protruding gear member 7452e1 forms an immersive state while the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state, and the joint rotation speed V4 is the first. 1 It means the rotation speed at which the protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 both form an overhanging state.

図46(a)に示すように、二層ギア8452が分離回転速度V3で回転されると、各突出ギア部材7452eがそれぞれ異なる張出量で二層ギア8452の径方向外側へ向けて移動される(少なくとも第2突出ギア部材7452e2の方が第1突出ギア部材7452e1よりも移動量が大きい)。 As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separated rotation speed V3, each protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8452 with a different overhang amount. (At least the second protruding gear member 7452e2 has a larger amount of movement than the first protruding gear member 7452e1).

本実施形態では、各突出ギア部材7452eと二層ギア7452の回転軸とを連結する付勢バネ8452fのバネ定数がそれぞれ異なって形成される。即ち、第1突出ギア部材7452e1と二層ギア8452の回転軸とを連結する第1付勢バネ8452f1のバネ定数は、第2突出ギア部材7452e2と二層ギア8452の回転軸とを連結する第2付勢バネ8452f2のバネ定数よりも大きくされる。なお、第3付勢バネ8452f3のバネ定数は第1付勢バネ8452f1のバネ定数よりも大きくされる。 In the present embodiment, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f that connect the protruding gear members 7452e and the rotating shafts of the two-layer gears 7452 are formed differently. That is, the spring constant of the first urging spring 8452f1 that connects the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452 is the second that connects the second protruding gear member 7452e2 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452. 2 It is made larger than the spring constant of the urging spring 8452f2. The spring constant of the third urging spring 8452f3 is made larger than the spring constant of the first urging spring 8452f1.

図46(a)に示すように、二層ギア7452が分離回転速度V3で回転されると、第1突出ギア部材7452e1は中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた面よりも回転軸側に位置され(没入状態)、第2突出ギア部材7452e2は中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた面よりも径方向外側に張り出される(張出状態)。 As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separated rotation speed V3, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is positioned on the rotation axis side of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected. (Immersion state), the second protruding gear member 7452e2 projects radially outward from the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (overhanging state).

そのため、後述するように、二層ギア8452が分離回転速度V3で回転される場合には、二層ギア8452は第1突出ギア部材7452e1では反転ギア7453と歯合開始されず、第2突出ギア部材7452e2で反転ギア7453と歯合される。 Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separated rotation speed V3, the two-layer gear 8452 does not start meshing with the reversing gear 7453 in the first protruding gear member 7452e1, and the second protruding gear The member 7452e2 meshes with the reversing gear 7453.

図46(b)に示すように、二層ギア8452が共同回転速度V4で回転される場合、突出ギア部材7452eを二層ギア8452の径方向外側へ移動させようとする力が生じる。この力と、付勢バネ8452fによる付勢力とが釣り合う位置まで突出ギア部材7452eが張出される。その張り出した状態において、少なくとも第1突出ギア部材7452e1及び第2突出ギア部材7452e2は中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた面よりも径方向外側に張り出される(張出状態)。 As shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, a force is generated to move the protruding gear member 7452e to the outside in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8452. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the urging force of the urging spring 8452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, at least the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 project radially outward from the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (overhanging state).

そのため、二層ギア8452が共同回転速度V4で回転される場合には、二層ギア8452の突出ギア部材7452eのうち第1突出ギア部材7452e1が反転ギア7453に当接することで、二層ギア7452が反転ギア7453に歯合され始める。 Therefore, when the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 of the protruding gear member 7452e of the double-layer gear 8452 abuts on the reversing gear 7453, so that the double-layer gear 7452 Begins to be meshed with the reversing gear 7453.

なお、二層ギア8452が共同回転速度V4で等速回転される場合の二層ギア8452、反転ギア7453及びスライド部材420の動作は図39から図41に図示される動作と同様であるため、説明を省略する。 Since the operations of the two-layer gear 8452, the reversing gear 7453, and the slide member 420 when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed of the joint rotation speed V4 are the same as the operations shown in FIGS. 39 to 41. The explanation is omitted.

図47(a)から図47(e)は、二層ギア8452及び反転ギア7453の回転を時系列で図示した二層ギア8452及び反転ギア7453の背面図である。なお、図47の説明においては、図40、図43及び図44を適宜参照すると共に、図47では、理解を容易とするためにギア歯452aおよび円板部452cの図示が省略される。 47 (a) to 47 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 showing the rotations of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order. In the description of FIG. 47, FIGS. 40, 43 and 44 are appropriately referred to, and in FIG. 47, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are omitted for easy understanding.

なお、図47(a)及び上述した図40(a)、図47(b)及び図43(a)、図47(c)及び図43(b)、図47(d)及び図44(a)、そして図47(e)及び図44(b)がそれぞれ略同時点の図であり、互いに対応関係にある。また、図47では、二層ギア8452及び反転ギア7453の回転方向が矢印で図示され、図47に示すように、円弧状凹部453cは二層ギア8452の中間ギア歯452b2の歯先を連ねた円に外接される態様で形成される。 It should be noted that FIG. 47 (a) and the above-mentioned FIGS. 40 (a), 47 (b) and 43 (a), 47 (c) and 43 (b), 47 (d) and 44 (a). ), And FIGS. 47 (e) and 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, and are in a corresponding relationship with each other. Further, in FIG. 47, the rotation directions of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 are illustrated by arrows, and as shown in FIG. 47, the arcuate recess 453c connects the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452. It is formed in a manner circumscribing a circle.

図47(a)に示すように、二層ギア8452はスライド部材420の移動開始直後(図40(a)参照)から分離回転速度V3で回転されるため、第1突出ギア部材7452e1が没入状態を形成すると共に、第2突出ギア部材7452e2は張出状態を形成する。 As shown in FIG. 47 (a), since the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is in an immersive state. The second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state.

そのため、二層ギア8452が所定量回転されても第1突出ギア部材7452e1が反転ギア7453の係合突状受け部453dに当接されないため、二層ギア8452と反転ギア7453との歯合は開始されない(図47(b)参照)。これにより、半月部材460の姿勢が維持されたままスライド部材420が移動される(図43(a)参照)。 Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453, so that the mesh between the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 is not good. It does not start (see FIG. 47 (b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while maintaining the posture of the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 43 (a)).

二層ギア8452が分離回転速度V3のまま回転を継続され、第2突出ギア部材7452e2が係合突状受け部453dに当接されることで反転ギア7453が回転され始めると共に半月部材460が姿勢変化し始める(図43(b)参照)。 The two-layer gear 8452 continues to rotate at the separated rotation speed V3, and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is brought into contact with the engaging projectile receiving portion 453d, so that the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate and the half moon member 460 is in a posture. It begins to change (see FIG. 43 (b)).

反転ギア7453が回転され始めた後、二層ギア8452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア7453の中間ギア歯453b2とが噛み合うことで、反転ギア7453の回転が継続されると共に半月部材460の姿勢変化が継続される(図47(d)及び図44(a)参照)。 After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other to continue the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and change the posture of the half moon member 460. Is continued (see FIGS. 47 (d) and 44 (a)).

二層ギア8452の中間ギア歯452b2と反転ギア7453の中間ギア歯453b2とが噛み合ったあと、更に二層ギア8452が回転されることで、反転ギア7453の円弧状凹部453cが再度二層ギア8452と外接され(図47(e)参照)、反転ギア7453の回転が停止されると共に半月部材460の姿勢が固定される(図44(b)参照)。 After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the double-layer gear 8452 is further rotated, so that the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is re-engaged with the double-layer gear 8452. (See FIG. 47 (e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the half moon member 460 is fixed (see FIG. 44 (b)).

その後、スライド部材420がスライド移動し終わる(図26(b)参照)まで二層ギア8452は回転され、スライド部材420が停止されることで回転を停止する。 After that, the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the slide member 420 is stopped to stop the rotation.

このように、本実施形態によれば、スライド部材420が退避位置から張出位置までスライド移動される間において半月部材460が回転され始める時の、スライド部材420の位置を少なくとも2通りで変更することができ、そのためにスライド部材420のスライド移動中の速度変化を要しない。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, the speed change during the slide movement of the slide member 420 is not required.

即ち、二層ギア8452が共同回転速度V4で定速回転される場合(図40及び図41参照)に比較して、二層ギア8452が分離回転速度V3で定速回転される場合(図43及び図44参照)に、半月部材460の回転する時のスライド部材420の配置を中央側(上下方向中心側)に寄せることができる(図40(b)及び図43(b)参照)。これにより、演出のバリエーションを増やすことができる。 That is, compared to the case where the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the joint rotation speed V4 (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the case where the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at a separate rotation speed V3 (FIG. 43). And FIG. 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the half-moon member 460 is rotated can be moved toward the center side (center side in the vertical direction) (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 43 (b)). This makes it possible to increase the variation of the production.

次いで、図48を参照して、上述した分離回転速度V3および共同回転速度V4をグラフにして説明する。図48は、二層ギア7452の回転速度Vを示すグラフである。なお、図48において、横軸はスライド部材420が退避位置(P=0)から張出位置(P=Pmax)の間におけるスライド部材420の位置(P)が示され、縦軸はスライド部材420のスライド移動時に回転される二層ギア7452の回転速度Vが示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the above-mentioned separated rotation speed V3 and joint rotation speed V4 will be described as a graph. FIG. 48 is a graph showing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452. In FIG. 48, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the overhanging position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis indicates the slide member 420. The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 that is rotated when the slide is moved is shown.

なお、図48の横軸において、第1位置P1は、第1突出ギア部材7452e1が反転ギア7453に初めに対向配置される位置(図39(b)参照)を意味し、第2位置P2は、第2突出ギア部材7452e2が反転ギア7453に初めに対向配置される位置(図42(c)を意味する。 On the horizontal axis of FIG. 48, the first position P1 means the position where the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B), and the second position P2 is , The position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (meaning FIG. 42C).

上述したとおり、本実施形態では、共同回転速度V4で二層ギア7452が回転される場合には、半月部材460はスライド部材420が第1位置P1に到達した直後に姿勢変化され始める。これに対し、分離回転速度V3で二層ギア7452が回転される場合には、半月部材460はスライド部材420が第2位置P2に到達した直後に姿勢変化され始める。 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

即ち、スライド部材420のスライド移動の速度を2種類設定しておけば、移動中にスライド部材420のスライド移動の速度を変化させなくとも、半月部材460の姿勢変化がされ始める時のスライド部材420の位置を変化させることができる。従って、スライド部材420および半月部材460の演出のバリエーションを増やすことができる。 That is, if two types of slide movement speeds of the slide member 420 are set, the slide member 420 when the posture of the half moon member 460 starts to change without changing the slide movement speed of the slide member 420 during movement. The position of can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460.

以上、上記実施形態に基づき本発明を説明したが、本発明は上記形態に何ら限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で種々の変形改良が可能であることは容易に推察できるものである。 Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

上記各実施形態において、一の実施形態における構成の一部または全部を、他の実施形態における構成の一部または全部の構成と組み合わせて或いは置き換えて、別の実施形態としても良い。 In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

上記各実施形態では、スライドラック442の移動に起因して半月部材460の爪部材463が移動する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、半月部材460が回転されることにより駆動レバー467が回転される回転軌跡状に係止ピンが配設され、駆動レバー467がその係止ピンにせき止められることで半月部材460と駆動レバーとの間に回転角度差が生じ、爪部材463が移動される態様でも良い。この場合、半月部材460の回転と爪部材463の移動とを連動させることができる。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the claw member 463 of the half-moon member 460 moves due to the movement of the slide rack 442 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a locking pin is arranged in a rotation locus in which the drive lever 467 is rotated by rotating the half moon member 460, and the drive lever 467 is dammed by the locking pin to form the half moon member 460 and the drive lever. A rotation angle difference may occur between the two, and the claw member 463 may be moved. In this case, the rotation of the half-moon member 460 and the movement of the claw member 463 can be linked.

上記各実施形態では、スライド部材420の切り欠き部422dが円弧状に形成される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、駆動ギア473から離間する方向へ向けて矩形状に切り欠かれても良い。これにより、切り欠き部422dの設計自由度を向上させると共に、スライド部材420に必要な材料を削減することができる。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the cutout portion 422d of the slide member 420 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be cut out in a rectangular shape in a direction away from the drive gear 473. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the notch portion 422d can be improved, and the material required for the slide member 420 can be reduced.

上記各実施形態では、駆動ギア473の歯先を連ねた形状が略円形である場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、駆動ギア473が周方向に4分割され、その分割された各部分ごとにギア歯の歯たけを異ならせても良い。この場合、ギア歯の歯たけが短い部分を被伝達脚部422へ向けて駆動ギア473を取り付けることで、駆動ギア473を通すために被伝達脚部422の切り欠き部422dに要求される大きさを小さくすることができる。その一方で、ギア歯の歯たけが長い部分で被伝達脚部422への駆動力の伝達を確保することができる。なお、上述した分割された部分において、ギア歯の形成されない部分があっても良い。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the shape in which the tooth tips of the drive gear 473 are connected is substantially circular has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive gear 473 may be divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the tooth depth of the gear teeth may be different for each of the divided parts. In this case, by attaching the drive gear 473 toward the transmitted leg portion 422 with the portion of the gear tooth having a short tooth gap, the size required for the notch portion 422d of the transmitted leg portion 422 to pass the drive gear 473 is increased. Can be reduced. On the other hand, it is possible to secure the transmission of the driving force to the transmitted leg portion 422 at the portion where the gear teeth have a long tooth gap. In addition, in the above-mentioned divided portion, there may be a portion where gear teeth are not formed.

上記各実施形態では、対向配置される一対の被伝達脚部422に形成される切り欠き部422dを通して駆動ギア473を付け外しする場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、被伝達脚部422に切り欠き部422dは形成されず、被伝達脚部422が互いに遠ざかる方向(スライド方向と垂直な方向)へ移動可能に形成されても良い。この場合、一対の被伝達脚部422が近づいて配置されると駆動ギア473は取り外し不能である一方、一対の被伝達脚部422が距離を空けて配置されると駆動ギア473は取り外し可能とすることができる。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is attached / detached through the notch portions 422d formed in the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cutout portion 422d may not be formed in the transmitted leg portion 422, and the transmitted leg portion 422 may be formed so as to be movable in a direction away from each other (a direction perpendicular to the slide direction). In this case, the drive gear 473 cannot be removed when the pair of transmitted legs 422 are arranged close to each other, while the drive gear 473 is removable when the pair of transmitted legs 422 are arranged at a distance. can do.

上記第5実施形態では、二層ギア5452の埋め込み孔5452gに磁性材料から形成される埋め込み部材5452hが埋設される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、二層ギア5452の始動ギア歯5452b1の周囲を磁性材料で覆う態様でも良い。これにより、磁性材料を始動ギア歯5452b1の外側に配設できるので、反転ギア5453と磁性材料との間隔を縮めることができ、二層ギア5452と反転ギア5453との間で歯合開始時に働く磁力をより強力にすることができる。 In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding member 5452h formed of the magnetic material is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g of the two-layer gear 5452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the periphery of the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 may be covered with a magnetic material. As a result, the magnetic material can be arranged outside the starting gear tooth 5452b1, so that the distance between the reversing gear 5453 and the magnetic material can be shortened, and the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 act at the start of meshing. The magnetic force can be made stronger.

上記第5実施形態では、反転ギア5453の始動ギア歯5453b1に埋め込み孔5453fが穿設される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、埋め込み孔5453fが係合突状受け部453dに穿設され埋め込み部材5453gが埋設される態様で形成しても良い。この場合、埋め込み部材5453gの磁力と、二層ギア5452に埋設される埋め込み部材5452hの磁力とが反発しあう関係となるように埋め込み部材5452h,5453gを埋設することで、二層ギア5452と反転ギア5453の当接時の衝撃を緩和することができる。即ち、二層ギア5452の始動ギア歯5452b1が反転ギア5453の係合突状受け部453dに当接される前に、反発する磁力により反転ギア5453を始動ギア歯5452b1から遠ざかる方向へ回転させることができる。従って、始動ギア歯5452b1の耐久性を向上させることができる。 In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedded hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 of the reversing gear 5453 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the embedding hole 5453f may be formed in a manner in which the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is bored and the embedding member 5453g is embedded. In this case, the embedded members 5452h and 5453g are embedded so that the magnetic force of the embedded member 5453g and the magnetic force of the embedded member 5452h embedded in the two-layer gear 5452 repel each other, thereby reversing with the two-layer gear 5452. The impact at the time of contact of the gear 5453 can be alleviated. That is, before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the double-layer gear 5452 is brought into contact with the engaging projectile receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453, the reversing gear 5453 is rotated in a direction away from the starting gear tooth 5452b1 by the repulsive magnetic force. Can be done. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 can be improved.

上記第7実施形態では、各突出ギア部材7452eの質量がそれぞれ等しい場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、各突出ギア部材7452eがそれぞれ質量を違えて形成され、質量のより大きい突出ギア部材7452eを付勢する付勢バネ7452fのバネ定数をより大きく形成しても良い。これにより、質量の大小による突出ギア部材7452eの張出方の違いを付勢バネ7452fの付勢力の大小により緩和することができる。 In the seventh embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each protruding gear member 7452e may be formed with a different mass, and the spring constant of the urging spring 7452f for urging the protruding gear member 7452e having a larger mass may be formed to be larger. Thereby, the difference in the way of projecting the protruding gear member 7452e depending on the magnitude of the mass can be alleviated by the magnitude of the urging force of the urging spring 7452f.

上記第7及び第8実施形態では、二層ギア7452,8452の突出ギア部材7452eが移動可能に形成されることで、二層ギア7452,8452と反転ギア7453との当接のタイミングを変化可能な場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、反転ギア7453が二層ギア7452,8452の軸直角方向に移動可能に形成されても良い。この場合、反転ギア7453が二層ギア7452,8452から離間することで、互いに当接されない状態を形成可能である一方、反転ギア7453が二層ギア7452,8452に近づくことで、互いに当接可能とすることができる。そのため、移動可能な突出ギア部材7452eを不要とした場合でも、二層ギア7452,8452と反転ギア7453との当接のタイミングを変化可能とすることができる。 In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is movably formed so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 can be changed. However, this is not always the case. For example, the reversing gear 7453 may be formed so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452. In this case, the reversing gear 7453 can be separated from the two-layer gears 7452, 8452 to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other, while the reversing gear 7453 can be brought into contact with the two-layer gears 7452, 8452. Can be. Therefore, even when the movable protruding gear member 7452e is not required, the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 can be changed.

上記第7及び第8実施形態では、二層ギア7452,8452の突出ギア部材7452eが移動可能に形成されることで、二層ギア7452,8452と反転ギア7453との当接のタイミングを変化可能な場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、二層ギア7452,8452が、反転ギア7453及び伝達ギア451と歯合されない第1状態と、反転ギア7453及び伝達ギア451と歯合される第2状態とを形成可能としても良い。この場合、第1状態では二層ギア7452,8452に駆動力を非伝達とする一方、第2状態では二層ギア7452,8452に駆動力を伝達することができる。そのため、移動可能な突出ギア部材7452eを不要とした場合でも、反転ギア7453が動作開始するタイミングを変化可能とすることができる。 In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is movably formed so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 can be changed. However, this is not always the case. For example, the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 may be able to form a first state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are not meshed with each other and a second state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are meshed with each other. In this case, the driving force is not transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 in the first state, while the driving force can be transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 in the second state. Therefore, even when the movable protruding gear member 7452e is not required, the timing at which the reversing gear 7453 starts operating can be changed.

上記第8実施形態では、各突出ギア部材7452eの質量がそれぞれ等しく、各付勢バネ8452fのバネ定数がそれぞれ異なる場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、各付勢バネ8452fのバネ定数はそれぞれ同一とし、各突出ギア部材7452eの質量をそれぞれ異ならせても良い。これにより、バネ定数を調整するよりも容易に各突出ギア部材7452eの張出量を調節することができる。 In the eighth embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal and the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f are different has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f may be the same, and the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e may be different. Thereby, the overhang amount of each protruding gear member 7452e can be adjusted more easily than adjusting the spring constant.

上記各実施形態では、駆動ギア473が駆動モータ472の駆動軸に一点で軸支される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、駆動モータ472の駆動軸に固着される軸支部材の端部にピンが複数突設されると共に、駆動ギア473の回転体部に複数のピンが嵌合される嵌合部が複数形成され、軸支部材と駆動ギア473とが複数点で係合されても良い。この場合、駆動モータ472の駆動軸と駆動ギア473との位相関係をピンが回転方向で駆動ギア473に引っかかることにより維持することができるので、駆動ギア473と複数のピンとの嵌め合わせを緩く形成することができる。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is pivotally supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 at one point has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of pins are projected from the end portions of the shaft support members fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 472, and a plurality of fitting portions into which the plurality of pins are fitted are formed in the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473. The shaft support member and the drive gear 473 may be engaged with each other at a plurality of points. In this case, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be maintained by the pins being caught by the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction, so that the drive gear 473 and the plurality of pins are loosely fitted. can do.

これにより、駆動モータ472と駆動ギア473の回転体部とを分離するために必要な力を小さくできるので、被伝達脚部422の前側壁部422cが変形したり駆動モータ472に過大な応力が付加されたりすることを防止することができる。 As a result, the force required to separate the drive motor 472 and the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 can be reduced, so that the front side wall portion 422c of the transmitted leg portion 422 is deformed or excessive stress is applied to the drive motor 472. It is possible to prevent it from being added.

本発明を上記各実施形態とは異なるタイプのパチンコ機等に実施してもよい。例えば、一度大当たりすると、それを含めて複数回(例えば2回、3回)大当たり状態が発生するまで、大当たり期待値が高められるようなパチンコ機(通称、2回権利物、3回権利物と称される)として実施してもよい。また、大当たり図柄が表示された後に、所定の領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるパチンコ機として実施してもよい。また、Vゾーン等の特別領域を有する入賞装置を有し、その特別領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として特別遊技状態となるパチンコ機に実施してもよい。更に、パチンコ機以外にも、アレパチ、雀球、スロットマシン、いわゆるパチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機などの各種遊技機として実施するようにしても良い。 The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

なお、スロットマシンは、例えばコインを投入して図柄有効ラインを決定させた状態で操作レバーを操作することにより図柄が変動され、ストップボタンを操作することにより図柄が停止されて確定される周知のものである。従って、スロットマシンの基本概念としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を変動表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する表示装置を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の変動表示が停止して確定表示され、その停止時の識別情報の組合せが特定のものであることを必要条件として、遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるスロットマシン」となり、この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。 In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, which is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

また、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機の具体例としては、複数の図柄からなる図柄列を変動表示した後に図柄を確定表示する表示装置を備えており、球打出用のハンドルを備えていないものが挙げられる。この場合、所定の操作(ボタン操作)に基づく所定量の球の投入の後、例えば操作レバーの操作に起因して図柄の変動が開始され、例えばストップボタンの操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、図柄の変動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄がいわゆる大当たり図柄であることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技が発生させられ、遊技者には、下部の受皿に多量の球が払い出されるものである。かかる遊技機をスロットマシンに代えて使用すれば、遊技ホールでは球のみを遊技価値として取り扱うことができるため、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが混在している現在の遊技ホールにおいてみられる、遊技価値たるメダルと球との別個の取扱による設備上の負担や遊技機設置個所の制約といった問題を解消し得る。 Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

以下に、本発明の遊技機に加えて上述した実施形態に含まれる各種発明の概念を示す。 The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<駆動ギア473と切り欠き部422dとが重なる技術思想の一例>
ベース部材に支持され側面にギア歯が刻設されると共に互いに歯合される第1ギア部材および第2ギア部材を備え、少なくとも前記第1ギア部材は回転ギアから形成され、前記第2ギア部材は、前記ギア歯の側面に覆設される板状部を備え、その板状部が、前記第1ギア部材の回転軸方向視において前記第1ギア部材の前記ギア歯であって前記第2ギア部材と歯合している前記ギア歯に重なり可能に形成される遊技機であって、前記板状部は、前記第2ギア部材のギア歯の歯先側から歯底側へえぐられて形成される切り欠き部を備え、前記切り欠き部と前記第1ギア部材とが所定位置に配置されることで、少なくとも前記第1ギア部材と前記板状部とが前記第1ギア部材の回転軸方向視で間隔を空けて視認される特定位相位置を形成可能であることを特徴とする遊技機A1。
<Example of technical concept in which the drive gear 473 and the notch 422d overlap>
A first gear member and a second gear member that are supported by a base member and have gear teeth engraved on the side surfaces and are meshed with each other are provided, and at least the first gear member is formed from a rotary gear and the second gear member. Is provided with a plate-shaped portion that is overlaid on the side surface of the gear tooth, and the plate-shaped portion is the gear tooth of the first gear member in the direction of rotation axis of the first gear member, and the second gear member. A gaming machine that is formed so as to be able to overlap the gear teeth that are in mesh with the gear member, and the plate-shaped portion is scooped out from the tooth tip side to the tooth bottom side of the gear teeth of the second gear member. The notch portion to be formed is provided, and the notch portion and the first gear member are arranged at predetermined positions, so that at least the first gear member and the plate-shaped portion rotate the first gear member. A game machine A1 characterized in that it is possible to form a specific phase position that is visually recognized at intervals in an axial view.

ここで、パチンコ機等の遊技機において、互いに歯合される一対のギア部材の内の一方のギア部材のギア歯の側面に板状部が形成されることで、一対のギア部材の内の一方のギア部材の反対側のギア部材である他方のギア部材の軸方向への移動を防止する遊技機がある(例えば特開2012−217702号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、他方のギア部材を抜き取る際に、一方のギア部材を予め抜き取る必要があった。そのため、メンテナンス性が低くなるという問題点があった。 Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plate-shaped portion is formed on the side surface of the gear teeth of one of the pair of gear members to be meshed with each other, so that the inside of the pair of gear members There is a gaming machine that prevents the other gear member, which is the gear member on the opposite side of one gear member, from moving in the axial direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217702). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the other gear member is pulled out, it is necessary to pull out one gear member in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that maintainability is low.

これに対し、遊技機A1によれば、板状部に切り欠き部が形成されることで、少なくとも特定位相位置において第1ギア部材の回転軸方向視で板状部と第1ギア部材とが間隔を空けて視認される。そのため、特定位相位置において、第1ギア部材を板状部の切り欠き部を通して引き抜くことができるので、第2ギア部材を予め抜き取ることなく第1ギア部材を交換することができる。よって、歯合される一対のギア部材のメンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the notch is formed in the plate-shaped portion, so that the plate-shaped portion and the first gear member are formed at least at a specific phase position in the direction of the rotation axis of the first gear member. It is visually recognized at intervals. Therefore, at the specific phase position, the first gear member can be pulled out through the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion, so that the first gear member can be replaced without pulling out the second gear member in advance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pair of gear members to be meshed with each other.

なお、第1ギア部材が回転ギアで形成されているので、板状部が形成される第2ギア部材は、回転ギアであってもラックギアであっても良い。 Since the first gear member is formed of a rotary gear, the second gear member on which the plate-shaped portion is formed may be a rotary gear or a rack gear.

遊技機A1において、前記切り欠き部は、前記第2ギア部材の歯先側において、その第2ギア部材の前記ギア歯の連設方向に沿った形成幅が、前記第2ギア部材の歯先を連ねた外形と前記第1ギア部材の歯先円とが交差する点間の前記第2ギア部材の前記ギア歯の連設方向に沿った距離と、同等か若干大きく設定されることを特徴とする遊技機A2。 In the game machine A1, the notch portion has a forming width on the tooth tip side of the second gear member along the continuous direction of the gear teeth of the second gear member, and the tooth tip of the second gear member. The distance between the point where the outer shape of the first gear member and the tooth tip circle of the first gear member intersect with each other is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the distance along the continuous direction of the gear teeth of the second gear member. Game machine A2.

遊技機A2によれば、遊技機A1の奏する効果に加え、第1ギア部材の回転軸方向視において第1ギア部材が切り欠き部と重なる期間を最小限に短くすることができる。これにより、第1ギア部材が回転軸方向に移動することを規制する作用を板状部により確保することができる。 According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the period in which the first gear member overlaps the notch portion in the direction of rotation axis of the first gear member can be shortened to the minimum. Thereby, the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction can be ensured by the plate-shaped portion.

なお、切り欠き部の形状は特に限定されるものではなく、円弧状でもよいし、矩形状でもよい。 The shape of the notch is not particularly limited, and may be an arc shape or a rectangular shape.

また、第2ギア部材のギア歯の大きさは均一である必要は無い。例えば、第2ギア部材が周方向に4分割され、その分割された部分ごとにギア歯の大きさ(特に歯たけ)が異なって形成される場合、小さなギア歯の歯先円と第2ギア部材の歯先を連ねた外形とが交差する点間の距離で切り欠き部を形成することで、大きなギア歯の歯先円を基に切り欠き部を形成する場合に比較して、切り欠き部が大型化することを抑制することができる。従って、第1ギア部材が回転軸方向に移動することを規制する作用を板状部により確保することができる。なお、上述した分割された部分において、ギア歯の形成されない部分があっても良い。 Further, the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member does not have to be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each divided portion, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear are formed. By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the tooth tips of the member intersects, the notch is formed as compared with the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of the large gear tooth. It is possible to prevent the portion from becoming large. Therefore, the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the direction of the rotation axis can be ensured by the plate-shaped portion. In addition, in the above-mentioned divided portion, there may be a portion where gear teeth are not formed.

遊技機A1又はA2において、前記切り欠き部は、前記第1ギア部材と同軸に形成される円であってその第1ギア部材の歯先円より若干大きな直径に形成される円を、前記第1ギア部材の回転軸方向から前記板状部に投影した場合に重なる形状で形成されることを特徴とする遊技機A3。 In the gaming machines A1 or A2, the notch is a circle formed coaxially with the first gear member and having a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member. 1 A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto the plate-shaped portion from the direction of the rotation axis of the gear member.

遊技機A3によれば、遊技機A1又はA2の奏する効果に加え、切り欠き部は、第1ギア部材の歯先円より若干大きな直径に形成されると共に第1ギア部材と同軸の円を第1ギア部材の回転軸方向から板状部に投影した場合に重なる形状に形成される。そのため、切り欠き部の大きさを最小限に抑えると共に、板状部の形成面積を最大限に確保することができ、板状部の剛性を向上させることができる。 According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the notch portion is formed to have a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member, and a circle coaxial with the first gear member is formed. 1 It is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto a plate-shaped portion from the direction of the rotation axis of the gear member. Therefore, the size of the notch portion can be minimized, the formation area of the plate-shaped portion can be secured to the maximum, and the rigidity of the plate-shaped portion can be improved.

なお、第2ギア部材のギア歯の大きさは均一である必要は無い。例えば、第2ギア部材が周方向に4分割され、その分割された部分ごとにギア歯の大きさ(特に歯たけ)が異なって形成される場合、小さなギア歯の歯先円と第2ギア部材の歯先を連ねた外形とが交差する点間の距離で切り欠き部を形成することで、大きなギア歯の歯先円を基に切り欠き部を形成する場合に比較して、切り欠き部が大型化することを抑制することができる。従って、板状部の形成面積を最大限に確保することができ、板状部の剛性を向上させることができる。なお、上述した分割された部分において、ギア歯の形成されない部分があっても良い。 The size of the gear teeth of the second gear member does not have to be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each divided portion, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear are formed. By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the tooth tips of the member intersects, the notch is formed as compared with the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of the large gear tooth. It is possible to prevent the portion from becoming large. Therefore, the formed area of the plate-shaped portion can be secured to the maximum, and the rigidity of the plate-shaped portion can be improved. In addition, in the above-mentioned divided portion, there may be a portion where gear teeth are not formed.

遊技機A2又はA3において、前記第1ギア部材に刻設される前記ギア歯と前記第2ギア部材に刻設される前記ギア歯とは、噛み合うギア歯の関係が固定される適正歯合状態を形成するものであって、その適正歯合状態は、前記第1ギア部材を、前記第2ギア部材に形成される前記切り欠き部に沿って移動させると共に前記第2ギア部材に歯合させることで形成されることを特徴とする遊技機A4。 In the game machine A2 or A3, the gear teeth engraved on the first gear member and the gear teeth engraved on the second gear member are in an appropriate meshing state in which the relationship between the meshing gear teeth is fixed. The proper meshing state thereof is such that the first gear member is moved along the notch formed in the second gear member and is meshed with the second gear member. A game machine A4 characterized by being formed by a tooth.

遊技機A4によれば、遊技機A2又はA3の奏する効果に加え、第2ギア部材の板状部の切り欠き部の外形に沿って第1ギア部材を移動させ、第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材とを歯合させると、ギア歯が適正歯合状態で歯合される。 According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the first gear member is moved along the outer shape of the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member to move the first gear member and the second gear member. When the gear members are meshed with each other, the gear teeth are meshed in a proper meshed state.

そのため、適正歯合状態に第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材とを歯合させる場合において、板状部の切り欠き部で第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材との歯合時の位置合わせを行うことができる。これにより、第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材との噛み合わせ調整を容易にすることができるので、ギア交換のメンテナンス性を向上することができる。 Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are meshed with each other in a proper meshing state, the notch of the plate-shaped portion is used to align the first gear member and the second gear member at the time of meshing. It can be carried out. As a result, the meshing adjustment between the first gear member and the second gear member can be facilitated, so that the maintainability of gear replacement can be improved.

なお、第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材とが相互に噛み合う歯の関係が固定される場合とは、歯合される回転ギア部材が側面の一部に歯が刻設される不完全ギアである場合や、回転ギア部材に対して往復移動する移動ラック部材が歯合される場合などが例示される。 In addition, when the relationship of the teeth in which the first gear member and the second gear member mesh with each other is fixed, the rotating gear member to be meshed is an incomplete gear in which teeth are engraved on a part of the side surface. An example is a case where a moving rack member that reciprocates with respect to a rotating gear member is meshed with each other.

なお、ギア交換時には、例えば、第1ギア部材の各歯を第2ギア部材のどの歯に歯合させるかが問題となるが、この場合に、相互に噛み合う歯の関係において適正歯合状態に歯合させるためには、相互に噛み合うギア歯が少なくとも一歯ずれることを抑制できればよい。 At the time of gear replacement, for example, which tooth of the second gear member is to be meshed with each tooth of the first gear member becomes a problem. In order to make the teeth mesh with each other, it is sufficient to prevent the gear teeth that mesh with each other from shifting by at least one tooth.

遊技機A1からA4において、少なくとも前記特定位相位置において、前記第1ギア部材または前記第2ギア部材の少なくとも一方のギア部材の移動抵抗が増加することを特徴とする遊技機A5。 A5 of the gaming machines A1 to A4, characterized in that the moving resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position.

遊技機A5によれば、遊技機A1からA4の奏する効果に加え、少なくとも前記特定位相位置において、第1ギア部材または第2ギア部材の少なくとも一方のギア部材の移動抵抗が増加する。そのため、メンテナンス作業者は移動抵抗が増加することを頼りに作業することで、例えば一対のギア部材を噛み合わせる(適正歯合位置でギア部材を嵌め込む)作業を容易とすることができる。 According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the movement resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position. Therefore, the maintenance worker can easily perform the work of engaging the pair of gear members (fitting the gear members at the proper meshing position) by relying on the increase in the movement resistance.

即ち、第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材とが移動の途中で止まった状態において、板状部の切り欠き部が第1ギア部材と合致していない場合には、第1ギア部材を抜き取ろうとしても、板状部が邪魔となり抜き取ることができない。そのため、第2ギア部材を移動させる必要がある。この場合に、抵抗が増加する位置まで第2ギア部材を移動させることで、板状部の切り欠き部を第1ギア部材と合致する位置に形成させることができ、第1ギア部材を抜き取ることが容易となる。 That is, when the first gear member and the second gear member are stopped in the middle of movement and the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion does not match the first gear member, the first gear member is pulled out. Even if you try, the plate-shaped part becomes an obstacle and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is necessary to move the second gear member. In this case, by moving the second gear member to a position where the resistance increases, the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion can be formed at a position matching the first gear member, and the first gear member can be pulled out. Becomes easier.

なお、移動抵抗が増加する場合としては、例えば、特定位相位置において第1ギア部材または第2ギア部材の少なくとも一方と擦れる摩擦部材が配設される場合や、特定位相位置において第1ギア部材または第2ギア部材の少なくとも一方が移動終端に到達する場合等が例示される。 The movement resistance increases, for example, when a friction member that rubs against at least one of the first gear member or the second gear member is arranged at a specific phase position, or the first gear member or the first gear member at a specific phase position. An example is a case where at least one of the second gear members reaches the end of movement.

遊技機A1からA4において、前記第1ギア部材および前記第2ギア部材がそれぞれ移動終端まで移動される態様で形成され、それぞれの前記移動終端に前記第1ギア部材および前記第2ギア部材が配置された場合に、前記第1ギア部材の回転軸方向視において前記板状部と前記第1ギア部材とが少なくとも一部重なることを特徴とする遊技機A6。 In the game machines A1 to A4, the first gear member and the second gear member are formed in such a manner that they are each moved to the end of movement, and the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at each end of movement. When this is done, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the plate-shaped portion and the first gear member overlap at least a part in the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member.

遊技機A6によれば、遊技機A1からA4のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材とが移動終端に配置された場合に、第1ギア部材の回転軸方向視において板状部と第1ギア部材とが少なくとも一部重なる。即ち、第1ギア部材および前記第2ギア部材の移動終端と異なる位置に特定位相位置(切り欠き部が第1ギア部材と合致する状態)が形成される。そのため、第1ギア部材および第2ギア部材が移動され、特定位相位置に第1ギア部材が差し掛かる際には第1ギア部材は十分な回転方向(軸垂直方向)への速度を備えている。よって、特定位相位置において発生しがちな第1ギア部材のぐらつきを、第1ギア部材の回転方向の勢いで緩和させることができる。 According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the end of movement, the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member At least a part of the plate-shaped portion and the first gear member overlap each other. That is, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion matches the first gear member) is formed at a position different from the moving end of the first gear member and the second gear member. Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are moved and the first gear member approaches the specific phase position, the first gear member has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (axis vertical direction). .. Therefore, the wobbling of the first gear member, which tends to occur at a specific phase position, can be alleviated by the momentum in the rotation direction of the first gear member.

遊技機A1からA6において、駆動力を発生する駆動モータを備え、前記第1ギア部材は引き抜き可能な態様で前記駆動モータに軸支され、その駆動モータと前記第1ギア部材との間の層に前記板状部が形成されることを特徴とする遊技機A7。 The gaming machines A1 to A6 include a drive motor that generates a driving force, and the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a pullable manner, and a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member. The gaming machine A7, characterized in that the plate-shaped portion is formed on the surface.

遊技機A7によれば、遊技機A1からA6の奏する効果に加え、第1ギア部材が引き抜き可能な態様で駆動モータに軸支される。 According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a pullable manner.

ここで、板状部が形成される側から第1ギア部材を第2ギア部材に歯合させようとしても、第1ギア部材が板状部に当接され移動が防止されるので、第1ギア部材と前記第2ギア部材とを歯合させることができない。そのため、駆動モータに第1ギア部材が軸支される場合は、駆動モータの配設位置が限定される恐れがあった。 Here, even if an attempt is made to engage the first gear member with the second gear member from the side where the plate-shaped portion is formed, the first gear member is brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion to prevent movement, so that the first gear member is prevented from moving. The gear member and the second gear member cannot be meshed with each other. Therefore, when the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor, the arrangement position of the drive motor may be limited.

これに対し、遊技機A7によれば、板状部の切り欠き部を第1ギア部材が通過できるので、駆動モータの配設位置が板状部との関係で限定されることはなく、駆動モータの配設自由度を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, since the first gear member can pass through the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion, the arrangement position of the drive motor is not limited in relation to the plate-shaped portion, and the driving motor is driven. The degree of freedom in disposing of the motor can be improved.

また、駆動モータと第1ギア部材との間の層に第2ギア部材の板状部が形成されるので、駆動モータの交換の際に、駆動モータと第1ギア部材とを合わせて外すか、駆動モータだけを外すかを選択することができる。 Further, since the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member is formed in the layer between the drive motor and the first gear member, the drive motor and the first gear member should be removed together when the drive motor is replaced. , You can choose to remove only the drive motor.

即ち、板状部に第1ギア部材を当接させたまま駆動モータを引き抜くことで、駆動モータと第1ギア部材とを容易に分離させることができる。このように駆動モータを交換することで、第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材との歯合状態を維持したまま駆動モータを交換することができ、第1ギア部材と第2ギア部材との再度の噛み合わせ調整を不要とすることができる。これによりメンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 That is, the drive motor and the first gear member can be easily separated by pulling out the drive motor while keeping the first gear member in contact with the plate-shaped portion. By exchanging the drive motor in this way, the drive motor can be exchanged while maintaining the meshed state between the first gear member and the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member can be exchanged again. It is possible to eliminate the need for meshing adjustment. This makes it possible to improve maintainability.

なお、第1ギア部材が駆動モータから引き抜き可能な態様で軸支される場合としては、第1ギア部材が駆動モータの駆動軸に外嵌固定される場合や、駆動モータの駆動軸の先端に配設されたアダプタから複数のピンが突設されると共に第1ギア部材にそれらの複数のピンが差し込まれる場合等が例示される。 When the first gear member is pivotally supported in a manner that allows it to be pulled out from the drive motor, the first gear member is externally fitted and fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, or is attached to the tip of the drive shaft of the drive motor. An example is an example in which a plurality of pins are projected from the arranged adapter and the plurality of pins are inserted into the first gear member.

遊技機A7において、前記第1ギア部材は、一方の端部が前記駆動モータの駆動軸に固着される軸部と、その軸部の前記一方の端部の反対側の端部である他方の端部に連結される回転体部とを備え、前記軸部と前記回転体部とは分離可能に形成され、前記軸部は、前記他方の端部の端面から軸心方向に突設される複数の突設ピンを備え、前記回転体部は、前記複数の突設ピンがそれぞれ嵌合される複数の嵌合部を備え、前記軸部と前記回転体部との連結は、前記複数の突設ピンが前記複数の嵌合部に嵌合されることで形成されることを特徴とする遊技機A8。 In the game machine A7, the first gear member is a shaft portion whose one end is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and the other end of the shaft portion which is the opposite end of the one end. A rotating body portion connected to an end portion is provided, and the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are formed so as to be separable, and the shaft portion projects from the end surface of the other end portion in the axial direction. A plurality of projecting pins are provided, the rotating body portion includes a plurality of fitting portions into which the plurality of projecting pins are fitted, and the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are connected to the plurality of fitting portions. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the projecting pins are formed by being fitted into the plurality of fitting portions.

ここで、第1ギア部材を板状部に当接させて駆動モータの駆動軸から直接引き抜くためには、駆動モータの駆動軸と第1ギア部材との間で生じる静止摩擦以上の力が必要となり、その静止摩擦以上の力が第1ギア部材に当接される板状部を通して第2ギア部材に付加される。静止摩擦は、駆動モータの駆動軸と第1ギア部材との位相関係を維持するために大きく設定されるので、板状部が変形したり駆動モータに過大な応力が付加されたりする恐れがある。 Here, in order to bring the first gear member into contact with the plate-shaped portion and pull it out directly from the drive shaft of the drive motor, a force greater than the static friction generated between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member is required. Then, a force equal to or greater than the static friction is applied to the second gear member through the plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the first gear member. Since the static friction is set to be large in order to maintain the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member, the plate-shaped portion may be deformed or excessive stress may be applied to the drive motor. ..

これに対し、遊技機A8によれば、遊技機A7の奏する効果に加え、駆動モータの駆動軸に固着される軸部の端部に突設ピンが複数突設されると共に回転体部に突設ピンが嵌合される嵌合部が複数形成される。即ち、軸部と回転体部とが複数点で係合されることで、静止摩擦を大きくすることなく、駆動モータの駆動軸と第1ギア部材との位相関係を維持することができる。 On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, a plurality of protrusion pins are projected at the end of the shaft portion fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, and the protrusion pins project into the rotating body portion. A plurality of fitting portions into which the setting pins are fitted are formed. That is, by engaging the shaft portion and the rotating body portion at a plurality of points, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member can be maintained without increasing the static friction.

そのため、駆動モータと第1ギア部材の回転体部とを分離するために必要な力を小さくできる。よって、第2ギア部材の板状部が変形したり駆動モータに過大な応力が付加されたりすることを防止する事ができる。 Therefore, the force required to separate the drive motor and the rotating body portion of the first gear member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member from being deformed or excessive stress being applied to the drive motor.

なお、嵌合部としては、貫通孔や、有底筒状に形成される窪みが例示される。 Examples of the fitting portion include a through hole and a recess formed in a bottomed tubular shape.

遊技機A7又はA8において、前記駆動モータに近接して配設されると共に、その駆動モータのモータケースの側面に沿って前記駆動モータの前記駆動軸の延設方向の反対方向へ延設される規制部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機A9。 In the gaming machine A7 or A8, it is arranged close to the drive motor and extends along the side surface of the motor case of the drive motor in a direction opposite to the extension direction of the drive shaft of the drive motor. A game machine A9 characterized by having a regulation unit.

遊技機A9によれば、遊技機A7又はA8の奏する効果に加え、駆動モータを第1ギア部材から引き抜く際に、駆動モータの側面に沿って延設される規制部に駆動モータを押し当てながら引き抜くことができる。これにより、駆動モータの軸心が第1ギア部材に対して傾くことを抑制することができ、第1ギア部材が変形することを抑制することができる。 According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7 or A8, when the drive motor is pulled out from the first gear member, the drive motor is pressed against the regulation portion extending along the side surface of the drive motor. Can be pulled out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the axial center of the drive motor from tilting with respect to the first gear member, and it is possible to suppress the deformation of the first gear member.

遊技機A9において、前記規制部が前記駆動モータのモータケースを間に挟んで一対で形成され、その一対の規制部の内の一方の規制部の延設端は、前記駆動モータの前記モータケースの端面であって前記駆動軸が配設される端面の反対側の端面より前記駆動軸側に形成されることを特徴とする遊技機A10。 In the gaming machine A9, the restricting portions are formed in pairs with the motor case of the drive motor sandwiched between them, and the extending end of one of the restricting portions of the pair of restricting portions is the motor case of the drive motor. The gaming machine A10, which is an end surface of the machine A10 and is formed on the drive shaft side from the end surface on the opposite side of the end surface on which the drive shaft is arranged.

遊技機A10によれば、遊技機A9の奏する効果に加え、一対で形成される規制部の内の一方の規制部の延設端が駆動モータのモータケースの端面よりも駆動軸側に形成されるので、一方の規制部の延設端を駆動モータの引き抜きの支点として有効に利用することができる。即ち、規制部の延設端と駆動モータの側面とは隣接配置されるので、規制部の延設端を支点とすると共に駆動モータの側面を作用点として駆動モータに力を加える場合に支点と作用点との距離を最短とすることができる。それにより、引き抜きに要する力を抑えることができる。 According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, an extended end of one of the regulating portions formed in a pair is formed on the drive shaft side of the end surface of the motor case of the drive motor. Therefore, the extended end of one of the regulating portions can be effectively used as a fulcrum for pulling out the drive motor. That is, since the extension end of the regulation portion and the side surface of the drive motor are arranged adjacent to each other, the extension end of the regulation portion is used as a fulcrum and the side surface of the drive motor is used as a fulcrum when a force is applied to the drive motor. The distance to the point of action can be minimized. As a result, the force required for pulling out can be suppressed.

また、一方の規制部の延設端を支点として駆動モータを引き抜く場合に、一方の規制部の反対側の規制部に駆動モータを押し当てながら駆動モータを引き抜くことができる。これにより、駆動モータを引き抜く際に駆動モータが他方のギアに対して傾く傾斜の度合いを抑えることができる。 Further, when the drive motor is pulled out with the extended end of one of the regulating portions as a fulcrum, the drive motor can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor against the regulating portion on the opposite side of the one regulating portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of inclination of the drive motor with respect to the other gear when the drive motor is pulled out.

遊技機A10において、前記一対の規制部の内、前記一方の規制部の反対側の規制部である他方の規制部が、前記一方の規制部の延設端部と同等に張り出すか、又は前記一方の規制部の延設端部よりも前記駆動モータの前記駆動軸の反対側へ張り出して形成されることを特徴とする遊技機A11。 In the gaming machine A10, of the pair of the regulation parts, the other regulation part, which is the opposite side of the one regulation part, protrudes in the same manner as the extended end part of the one regulation part, or The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is formed so as to project from the extended end of one of the regulating portions to the opposite side of the drive shaft of the drive motor.

遊技機A11によれば、遊技機A11の奏する効果に加え、駆動モータの引き抜き時に駆動モータが押しつけられる他方の規制部が、少なくとも一方の規制部の延設端部よりも駆動モータの駆動軸の反対側へ張り出して形成される。そのため、一方の規制部の延設端を支点として駆動モータを引き抜く際に作用点が他方の規制部に最も近接される状態(即ち、作用点が駆動モータの駆動軸に垂直な平面であって一方の規制部の延設端を含む平面に配置される状態)において、他方の規制部により駆動モータの移動を防止することができる。 According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A11, the other regulating portion to which the driving motor is pressed when the drive motor is pulled out is closer to the driving shaft of the driving motor than the extended end of at least one regulating portion. It is formed by overhanging to the opposite side. Therefore, when the drive motor is pulled out with the extended end of one regulating portion as a fulcrum, the point of action is closest to the other regulating section (that is, the point of action is a plane perpendicular to the drive axis of the drive motor). In a state where it is arranged on a plane including the extended end of one regulating portion), the movement of the drive motor can be prevented by the other regulating portion.

これにより、駆動モータを引き抜く際に駆動モータが一方の規制部から離間する方向へ移動することを確実に防止することができる。 This makes it possible to reliably prevent the drive motor from moving in a direction away from one of the regulating portions when the drive motor is pulled out.

遊技機A7からA11において、前記第1ギア部材を挟んで前記第2ギア部材と対向配置される移動当接部材を備え、その移動当接部材は、前記特定位相位置において前記第1ギア部材の軸心方向視において前記第1ギア部材と間隔を空けて配設され、かつ、前記第2ギア部材の前記板状部が前記第1ギア部材に前記第1ギア部材の軸心方向視において重なる状態の内の少なくとも1の状態において、前記第1ギア部材の軸心方向視において前記第1ギア部材と前記移動当接部材とが重なることを特徴とする遊技機A12。 The game machines A7 to A11 include a moving contact member that is arranged so as to face the second gear member with the first gear member interposed therebetween, and the moving contact member is the first gear member at the specific phase position. It is arranged at a distance from the first gear member in the axial direction, and the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member overlaps the first gear member in the axial direction of the first gear member. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that, in at least one of the states, the first gear member and the moving contact member overlap each other in the axial direction of the first gear member.

遊技機A12によれば、遊技機A7からA11の奏する効果に加え、第1ギア部材が第2ギア部材の板状部と、その第2ギア部材と対向配置される移動当接部材とに同時に当接される。これにより、駆動モータから第1ギア部材が引き抜かれる際の第1ギア部材の傾きを抑制することができる。 According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A7 to A11, the first gear member simultaneously attaches to the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member and the moving contact member arranged to face the second gear member. Be abutted. As a result, the inclination of the first gear member when the first gear member is pulled out from the drive motor can be suppressed.

<噛み合わせ用の始動ギア歯452b1が大型に形成される技術思想の一例>
回転ギアとして形成される主動ギア部材と、その主動ギア部材の回転途中に歯合を開始される従動ギア部材とを備え、それら主動ギア部材および従動ギア部材の少なくとも一方は、歯合開始時に当接される噛み合い歯と、その噛み合い歯が歯合した後の歯合継続時に噛み合う中間歯とを備え、前記噛み合い歯が、前記中間歯に比較して大型に形成されることを特徴とする遊技機B1。
<Example of technical concept in which the starting gear tooth 452b1 for meshing is formed in a large size>
A driving gear member formed as a rotary gear and a driven gear member whose meshing is started during rotation of the driving gear member are provided, and at least one of the driving gear member and the driven gear member is hit at the start of meshing. A game characterized in that a meshing tooth to be in contact and an intermediate tooth that meshes when the meshing teeth are continued after the meshing teeth are meshed are provided, and the meshing tooth is formed larger than the intermediate tooth. Machine B1.

ここで、主動ギア部材(駆動モータで回転される側)の回転途中に主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材(主動ギア部材の回転が伝達される側)との歯合が開始される遊技機がある(例えば特開2013−244210号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との歯合開始時に噛み合う歯は、噛み合いはじめに衝突を受け、破損しやすかった。一方、ギアの歯を大きくすればギア歯の破損防止をすることはできるが、バックラッシが大きくなり、従動ギア部材を滑らかに回転させることが難しくなる。そのため、耐久性と回転の滑らかさの両立を達成することは困難であった。 Here, there is a gaming machine in which meshing between the main gear member and the driven gear member (the side on which the rotation of the main gear member is transmitted) is started during the rotation of the main gear member (the side rotated by the drive motor). (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the teeth that mesh with each other at the start of meshing between the main gear member and the driven gear member are liable to be damaged due to a collision at the beginning of meshing. On the other hand, if the gear teeth are enlarged, the gear teeth can be prevented from being damaged, but the backlash becomes large and it becomes difficult to smoothly rotate the driven gear member. Therefore, it has been difficult to achieve both durability and smooth rotation.

これに対し、遊技機B1によれば、噛み合い歯が中間歯に比較して大型に形成されるので、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との少なくとも一方は歯合開始時に噛み合う噛み合い歯の耐久性が向上され、噛み合い歯の破損を防止することができる。また、中間歯において主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材とのバックラッシを小さくできるので、噛み合い歯が歯合した後で中間歯が歯合される歯合継続時における従動ギア部材の回転を滑らかなものにすることができる。これにより、噛み合い歯の耐久性向上と、従動ギア部材の回転の滑らかさの向上とを両立させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the meshing teeth are formed larger than the intermediate teeth, at least one of the main gear member and the driven gear member has the durability of the meshing teeth that mesh with each other at the start of meshing. It is improved and the damage of the meshing teeth can be prevented. In addition, since the backlash between the main gear member and the driven gear member can be reduced in the intermediate teeth, the rotation of the driven gear member during continuous meshing in which the intermediate teeth are meshed after the meshing teeth are meshed can be made smooth. can do. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the meshing teeth and the smoothness of rotation of the driven gear member at the same time.

なお、歯合開始時とは、主動ギア部材または従動ギア部材の少なくとも一方に形成される噛み合い歯が、その一方のギア部材の反対側の他方のギア部材に当接され始める状態を意味する。 The start of meshing means a state in which the meshing teeth formed on at least one of the driving gear member and the driven gear member start to come into contact with the other gear member on the opposite side of the one gear member.

また、噛み合い歯を大型に形成するとは、歯幅、歯厚または歯たけの内の少なくとも1つを中間歯に比較して大きく形成することを意味する。 Further, forming the meshing tooth in a large size means forming at least one of the tooth width, the tooth thickness or the tooth depth larger than that of the intermediate tooth.

遊技機B1において、前記従動ギア部材の姿勢を保持する保持機構を備えることを特徴とする遊技機B2。 The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 includes a holding mechanism for holding the posture of the driven gear member.

遊技機B2によれば、遊技機B1の奏する効果に加え、従動ギア部材の姿勢を保持する保持機構を備えるため、主動ギア部材に歯合されていない状態における従動ギア部材の姿勢を安定させることができる。 According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, a holding mechanism for holding the posture of the driven gear member is provided, so that the posture of the driven gear member is stabilized in a state where the driven gear member is not meshed with the main gear member. Can be done.

なお、保持機構としては、従動ギア部材を軸方向に挟持して保持する機構や、機械的な位置合わせにより保持を行う機構等が例示される。 Examples of the holding mechanism include a mechanism for holding the driven gear member by sandwiching it in the axial direction, a mechanism for holding the driven gear member by mechanical alignment, and the like.

遊技機B2において、前記従動ギア部材が前記主動ギア部材から退避する方向に切り欠かれる切り欠き部を備え、その切り欠き部が、前記主動ギア部材の外周に少なくとも2点で当接されることにより、前記保持機構が形成されることを特徴とする遊技機B3。 In the gaming machine B2, the driven gear member is provided with a notch portion that is cut out in a direction of retracting from the driving gear member, and the notch portion is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the driving gear member at at least two points. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the holding mechanism is formed by the machine.

遊技機B3によれば、遊技機B2の奏する効果に加え、従動ギア部材を保持する保持機構を、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との2点での当接で形成することができる。これにより、従動ギア部材の姿勢を保持するための別部材を配設不要とすることができる。 According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, a holding mechanism for holding the driven gear member can be formed by abutting the driven gear member and the driven gear member at two points. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose of another member for maintaining the posture of the driven gear member.

なお、切り欠き部は、主動ギア部材の歯先円に干渉しない形であれば良く、形状は限定されるものではないが、少なくとも、切り欠き部の曲率半径が主動ギア部材の歯先円の半径以下に形成される。 The notch portion may have a shape that does not interfere with the tooth tip circle of the driving gear member, and the shape is not limited, but at least the radius of curvature of the notch portion is that of the tooth tip circle of the driving gear member. It is formed below the radius.

遊技機B3において、前記切り欠き部が、前記主動ギア部材に外接する円弧状の凹部として形成されることを特徴とする遊技機B4。 The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B3, the notch portion is formed as an arc-shaped concave portion circumscribing the driving gear member.

遊技機B4によれば、遊技機B3の奏する効果に加え、従動ギア部材の切り欠き部が主動ギア部材の外周に面で当接されることで、従動ギア部材の姿勢を保持する効果を向上させることができる。 According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the driving gear member on a surface, thereby improving the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member. Can be made to.

即ち、従動ギア部材の切り欠き部が主動ギア部材の外周に面で当接されることで、当接時の摩擦力が一箇所に集中することを抑制し、切り欠き部の全体に摩擦力を分散させることができる。これにより、主動ギア部材で従動ギア部材を保持する箇所を増加させ、従動ギア部材の姿勢を維持する効果を向上させることができる。 That is, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the driving gear member on a surface, thereby suppressing the frictional force at the time of contact from being concentrated in one place, and the frictional force is applied to the entire notch portion. Can be dispersed. As a result, the number of places where the driven gear member is held by the driven gear member can be increased, and the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member can be improved.

なお、切り欠き部が主動ギア部材に外接される態様は特に限定されるものではない。即ち、例えば、主動ギア部材の歯先円に外接される態様でも良いし、主動ギア部材にギア歯が省略される面が形成されその省略される面に外接される態様でも良い。 The mode in which the notch portion is circumscribed to the driving gear member is not particularly limited. That is, for example, it may be a mode in which the gear teeth are circumscribed to the tooth tip circle of the driving gear member, or a surface in which the gear teeth are omitted is formed on the driving gear member and is circumscribed on the omitted surface.

遊技機B4において、前記主動ギア部材と前記従動ギア部材の前記切り欠き部とは、互いの当接点が前記主動ギア部材の中心軸から前記従動ギア部材の歯底を連ねた面に引かれた垂線の少なくとも両側に形成されることを特徴とする遊技機B5。 In the gaming machine B4, the contact point between the driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member is drawn from the central axis of the driving gear member to the surface connecting the tooth bottoms of the driven gear member. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is formed on at least both sides of a perpendicular line.

遊技機B5によれば、遊技機B4の奏する効果に加え、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材の切り欠き部との当接点が主動ギア部材の中心軸から従動ギア部材の歯底を連ねた面に引かれた垂線の少なくとも両側に形成されるので、切り欠き部が主動ギア部材に当接されている状態において、従動ギア部材の両方向への回転(移動)を防止することができる。 According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the contact point between the driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member is on the surface where the tooth bottom of the driven gear member is connected from the central axis of the driving gear member. Since it is formed on at least both sides of the drawn perpendicular line, it is possible to prevent the driven gear member from rotating (moving) in both directions in a state where the notch is in contact with the main gear member.

なお、従動ギア部材としては、回転ギアとして形成される回転ギア部材や、平行移動するギアとして形成されるラックギア等が例示される。 Examples of the driven gear member include a rotary gear member formed as a rotary gear, a rack gear formed as a gear that moves in parallel, and the like.

遊技機B2からB5のいずれかにおいて、前記従動ギア部材は、前記噛み合い歯よりも大型に形成される係合突状受け部を備え、その係合突状受け部に前記切り欠き部が形成され、前記主動ギア部材と前記従動ギア部材との歯合は、前記主動ギア部材の前記噛み合い歯と前記係合突状受け部とが当接した後で開始されることを特徴とする遊技機B6。 In any of the game machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member includes an engaging protrusion receiving portion formed larger than the meshing tooth, and the notch portion is formed in the engaging protrusion receiving portion. B6 ..

遊技機B6によれば、遊技機B2からB5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、係合突状受け部を主動ギア部材に当接される歯の代わりとして利用することで、従動ギア部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member is durable by using the engaging protrusion receiving portion as a substitute for the tooth abutted on the driving gear member. The sex can be improved.

切り欠き部が形成される係合突状受け部は、本来、主動ギア部材のギア歯と歯合する役割の部分ではなく、主動ギア部材の外周面に当接することで従動ギア部材の姿勢の維持を図る役割の部分である。そのため、ギア歯のように、歯合されるギア歯の大きさに合わせて大きさが制限されるものではない。よって、ギア歯よりも頑丈に形成された係合突状受け部を主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との歯合開始時に当接される部分に使用することで、従動ギア部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 The engaging projectile receiving portion in which the notch is formed is not a part that originally plays a role of engaging with the gear teeth of the driving gear member, but is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the driving gear member to change the posture of the driven gear member. It is a part of the role of maintaining. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth to be meshed. Therefore, the durability of the driven gear member is improved by using the engaging protrusion receiving portion, which is formed stronger than the gear tooth, at the portion where the main gear member and the driven gear member come into contact with each other at the start of meshing. Can be made to.

遊技機B6において、前記主動ギア部材は、前記噛み合い歯に隣接して形成される窪みである窪み部を備え、前記主動ギア部材の前記噛み合い歯が前記係合突状受け部に当接される前に前記係合突状受け部が前記窪み部に進入する態様で前記従動ギア部材が回転されることを特徴とする遊技機B7。 In the gaming machine B6, the driving gear member includes a recessed portion that is a recess formed adjacent to the meshing tooth, and the meshing tooth of the driving gear member is brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion. A gaming machine B7, wherein the driven gear member is rotated in a manner in which the engaging protrusion receiving portion enters the recessed portion.

遊技機B7によれば、遊技機B6の奏する効果に加え、主動ギア部材の噛み合い歯が従動ギア部材の係合突状受け部に当接する前に従動ギア部材が回転されるので、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との歯合開始時の衝撃を抑制することができる。 According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the driven gear member is rotated before the meshing teeth of the driving gear member come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the driving gear member is rotated. The impact at the start of meshing with the driven gear member can be suppressed.

ここで、従動ギア部材が主動ギア部材の外周面に2点で当接されている場合、主動ギア部材が回転しても、従動ギア部材は姿勢が維持される。一方で、主動ギア部材の噛み合い歯が従動ギア部材の係合突状受け部に近接すると、その噛み合い歯に隣接して形成される窪み部が係合突状受け部と対面する。窪み部は係合突状受け部と当接されないので、従動ギア部材の姿勢を維持する効果が解除される。そして、主動ギア部材の外周面と係合突状受け部との間に生じる摩擦力により、従動ギア部材がわずかに回転され、係合突状受け部が窪み部に進入する。これにより、主動ギア部材の噛み合い歯が従動ギア部材の係合突状受け部に当接される前に従動ギア部材が回転を開始するので、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材とが歯合を開始する際の衝撃を抑制することができる。 Here, when the driven gear member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the driven gear member at two points, the posture of the driven gear member is maintained even if the driven gear member rotates. On the other hand, when the meshing teeth of the main gear member are close to the engaging protrusion receiving portion of the driven gear member, the recessed portion formed adjacent to the engaging protrusion faces the engaging protrusion receiving portion. Since the recessed portion does not come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion, the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member is released. Then, the driven gear member is slightly rotated by the frictional force generated between the outer peripheral surface of the main gear member and the engaging protrusion receiving portion, and the engaging protruding receiving portion enters the recessed portion. As a result, the driven gear member starts rotating before the meshing teeth of the driven gear member are brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the driven gear member and the driven gear member start meshing with each other. It is possible to suppress the impact when doing so.

<突出ギア部材7452eが二層ギア7452の径方向に移動する技術思想の一例>
駆動力を発生させる駆動源と、その駆動源の駆動力で回転される主動ギア部材と、その主動ギア部材の回転と連動して移動される第1移動部材と、前記主動ギア部材の回転の途中で前記主動ギア部材と連動して移動開始される従動ギア部材と、その従動ギア部材の移動と連動して移動される第2移動部材と、前記主動ギア部材および前記従動ギア部材の連動を開始させる調整装置と、を備え、前記第1移動部材は、移動基端から移動終端までの移動範囲で移動され、前記調整装置により前記従動ギア部材が前記主動ギア部材と連動して移動開始する時における前記第1移動部材の位置を複数形成可能であることを特徴とする遊技機C1。
<Example of technical concept in which the protruding gear member 7452e moves in the radial direction of the double-layer gear 7452>
A drive source that generates a driving force, a driving gear member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving source, a first moving member that is moved in conjunction with the rotation of the driving gear member, and a rotation of the driving gear member. The driven gear member that starts moving in conjunction with the driven gear member on the way, the second moving member that moves in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member, and the driven gear member and the driven gear member are interlocked with each other. The first moving member is moved within a moving range from the moving base end to the moving end, and the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the driving gear member by the adjusting device. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a plurality of positions of the first moving member can be formed at the time.

ここで、パチンコ機等の遊技機において、単一の駆動源の駆動力で移動される第1移動部材と第2移動部材とを備える遊技機がある(例えば特開2009−125092号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、第1移動部材の移動途中の特定の位置における第2移動部材の態様が一通りに限定されるため、演出のバリエーションが少ないという問題点があった。 Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that are moved by a driving force of a single driving source (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-125022). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the mode of the second moving member at a specific position during the movement of the first moving member is limited to one, there is a problem that there are few variations in the effect.

これに対し、遊技機C1によれば、調整装置により従動ギア部材が主動ギア部材と連動して移動を始める時における第1移動部材の位置を複数形成可能なので、従動ギア部材と連動する第2移動部材が移動を始める時の第1移動部材の位置を複数形成することができる。よって、第1移動部材および第2移動部材の演出のバリエーションを複数形成することができる。 On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the driven gear member can be formed by the adjusting device, so that the second moving gear member is linked with the driven gear member. A plurality of positions of the first moving member when the moving member starts moving can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of variations of the effects of the first moving member and the second moving member.

なお、主動ギア部材と連動して従動ギア部材が移動を始める場合としては、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材とが歯合されることで従動ギア部材が移動される態様や、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との間で生じる摩擦で従動ギア部材が移動される態様や、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材とが磁性体材料から形成され、それら主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との間で生じる磁力で従動ギア部材が移動される態様等が例示される。 When the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the driven gear member, the driven gear member is moved by engaging the driven gear member and the driven gear member, or the driven gear member and the driven gear member are driven. The mode in which the driven gear member is moved by the friction generated between the gear members, or the magnetic force generated between the driven gear member and the driven gear member when the driven gear member and the driven gear member are formed of a magnetic material. An embodiment in which the driven gear member is moved is exemplified.

また、調整装置の形成態様としては、主動ギア部材または従動ギア部材の少なくとも一方のギア歯が回転軸から離間する方向に張り出し可能に形成される態様や、主動ギア部材および従動ギア部材の軸間距離を変更可能に形成される態様等が例示される。 Further, as the forming mode of the adjusting device, at least one gear tooth of the driving gear member or the driven gear member is formed so as to be able to project in a direction away from the rotation axis, and between the shafts of the driving gear member and the driven gear member. An embodiment in which the distance can be changed is exemplified.

遊技機C1において、前記主動ギア部材と前記従動ギア部材との連動は歯合によるものであって、前記調整装置は、前記主動ギア部材に配設されると共に前記主動ギア部材の径方向に移動可能とされる突出部材を備え、その突出部材は、前記従動ギア部材に前記主動ギア部材の回転方向から当接可能な位置まで張り出す張出状態と、前記従動ギア部材に回転方向から当接不能な位置に配置される没入状態と、を形成可能とされ、前記突出部材が前記張出状態を形成しながら前記主動ギア部材が回転する場合に、前記従動ギア部材に前記突出部材が当接され、前記主動ギア部材と前記従動ギア部材との歯合が開始されることを特徴とする遊技機C2。 In the game machine C1, the interlocking of the driving gear member and the driven gear member is due to the meshing, and the adjusting device is arranged on the driving gear member and moves in the radial direction of the driving gear member. The projecting member is provided with a possible projecting member, and the projecting member is in an overhanging state in which the driven gear member is projected from the rotational direction of the driven gear member to a position where it can be contacted, and is in contact with the driven gear member from the rotational direction. An immersive state that is arranged at an impossible position can be formed, and when the main gear member rotates while the protruding member forms the overhanging state, the protruding member comes into contact with the driven gear member. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the engagement between the driving gear member and the driven gear member is started.

遊技機C2によれば、遊技機C1の奏する効果に加え、調整装置の突出部材が張出状態となるか、没入状態となるかによって、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との連動の仕方を異ならせることができる。 According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the way in which the main gear member and the driven gear member are interlocked differs depending on whether the protruding member of the adjusting device is in the overhanging state or the immersive state. Can be made.

ここで、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との歯合の開始および解除は、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との軸間距離を変化させることでも行うことができる。しかしその場合、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との歯合抵抗を抑制するために回転軸の平行度を維持したまま回転軸を軸垂直方向に移動させる必要があり、移動の平行度に精度が要求される。そのため、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材とを移動させる機構が複雑化する恐れがある。 Here, the start and release of the meshing between the driving gear member and the driven gear member can also be performed by changing the distance between the axes of the driving gear member and the driven gear member. However, in that case, in order to suppress the meshing resistance between the driving gear member and the driven gear member, it is necessary to move the rotating shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis while maintaining the parallelism of the rotating shaft, and the accuracy of the moving parallelism is improved. Required. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the main gear member and the driven gear member may be complicated.

これに対し、遊技機C2では、主動ギア部材が径方向に移動可能に形成される突出部材を備え、その突出部材が張り出す場合(張出状態を形成する場合)に主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との歯合が開始される。そのため、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との回転軸を移動させることは不要であるので回転軸の平行度は保持される。従って、突出部材を移動させる機構に精度が要求されず、突出部材を移動させる機構を単純化できる。 On the other hand, in the gaming machine C2, the main gear member is provided with a protruding member formed so as to be movable in the radial direction, and when the protruding member overhangs (when forming an overhanging state), the main gear member and the driven gear The meshing with the member is started. Therefore, it is not necessary to move the rotation shafts of the main gear member and the driven gear member, so that the parallelism of the rotation shafts is maintained. Therefore, accuracy is not required for the mechanism for moving the protruding member, and the mechanism for moving the protruding member can be simplified.

なお、突出部材を張出状態に形成させる方法としては、主動ギア部材を回転させた時に生じる遠心力で突出部材を張り出させる方法や、突出部材の内側にソレノイドが配設されソレノイドの駆動により突出部材を張り出させる方法等が例示される。また、突出部材は一つでも複数でも良い。 As a method of forming the projecting member in an overhanging state, a method of projecting the projecting member by centrifugal force generated when the main gear member is rotated, or a method in which a solenoid is arranged inside the projecting member and driven by the solenoid. An example is a method of projecting a protruding member. Further, the number of protruding members may be one or a plurality.

遊技機C2において、前記突出部材は、前記主動ギア部材の回転軸側へ向けて生じる付勢力を受けることで少なくとも前記主動ギア部材の静止状態において前記没入状態を形成され、前記主動ギア部材を回転させる回転速度を切り替えることによって前記没入状態と前記張出状態とを切り替え可能に形成されることを特徴とする遊技機C3。 In the gaming machine C2, the protruding member receives the urging force generated toward the rotation shaft side of the driving gear member to form the immersive state at least in the stationary state of the driving gear member, and rotates the driving gear member. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to switch between the immersive state and the overhanging state by switching the rotation speed to be caused.

遊技機C3によれば、遊技機C2の奏する効果に加え、主動ギア部材の回転速度を異ならせることで、突出部材が従動ギア部材と当接する張出状態と、突出部材が従動ギア部材に対して空転する没入状態とを切り替えることができる。 According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, by making the rotation speed of the driving gear member different, the protruding member comes into contact with the driven gear member and the protruding member is in contact with the driven gear member. It is possible to switch between the immersive state of idling.

これにより、駆動源の動作速度の制御と突出部材の状態とを連動させることができるので、例えば突出部材をソレノイドで張り出させる場合に比較して、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との連動の制御を単純化することができる。 As a result, the control of the operating speed of the drive source and the state of the projecting member can be interlocked with each other. Control can be simplified.

なお、付勢力を生じさせる部材としては、コイルスプリングやねじりバネなどの弾性バネや、伸縮性の十分あるゴム材料からなる部材等が例示される。 Examples of the member that generates the urging force include elastic springs such as coil springs and torsion springs, and members made of a rubber material having sufficient elasticity.

また、突出部材は、位相違いで主動ギア部材に複数配設されても良い。この場合、各突出部材の重量や、各突出部材に作用する付勢力を調整することで各突出部材が張り出す量を調整することができる。 Further, a plurality of protruding members may be arranged on the main gear member in different phases. In this case, the amount of protrusion of each protruding member can be adjusted by adjusting the weight of each protruding member and the urging force acting on each protruding member.

遊技機C2又はC3において、前記突出部材は、第1突出部材と、その第1突出部材と位相違いで形成される第2突出部材とを備え、それらの第1突出部材と第2突出部材とは前記主動ギア部材の回転により張り出される量が略同等とされ、前記主動ギア部材は、前記第1突出部材および前記第2突出部材が前記没入状態を形成する第1回転速度と、前記第1突出部材および前記第2突出部材が前記張出状態を形成する第2回転速度とを形成可能とされ、前記主動ギア部材の回転速度を、前記第1回転速度と前記第2回転速度との間で前記主動ギア部材の回転途中に切り替え可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機C4。 In the game machine C2 or C3, the projecting member includes a first projecting member and a second projecting member formed in phase with the first projecting member, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member thereof. The amount of protrusion due to the rotation of the driving gear member is substantially the same, and the driving gear member has the first rotational speed at which the first protruding member and the second protruding member form the immersive state, and the first The 1-protruding member and the 2nd protruding member can form a second rotation speed that forms the overhanging state, and the rotation speed of the driving gear member is defined as the first rotation speed and the second rotation speed. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it can be switched between the two during the rotation of the driving gear member.

遊技機C4によれば、遊技機C2又はC3の奏する効果に加え、主動ギア部材の回転速度を回転中に変化させることで、第1突出部材で従動ギア部材に当接され始める位相と、第2突出部材で従動ギア部材に当接され始める位相との少なくとも2種類の位相で主動ギア部材を従動ギア部材に当接させることができる。 According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2 or C3, the phase at which the first protruding member starts to come into contact with the driven gear member by changing the rotation speed of the main gear member during rotation, and the first The driving gear member can be brought into contact with the driven gear member in at least two kinds of phases, which is the phase at which the protruding member starts to come into contact with the driven gear member.

即ち、第1回転速度で主動ギア部材を回転させておいて、第1突出部材が従動ギア部材側に位置される直前に主動ギア部材の回転速度を第2回転速度に変更することで、第1突出部材で従動ギア部材との歯合を開始させることができる。また、一方で、第1回転速度で主動ギア部材を回転させておいて、第2突出部材が従動ギア部材側に位置される直前に主動ギア部材の回転速度を第2回転速度に変更することで、第2突出部材で従動ギア部材との歯合を開始させることができる。 That is, by rotating the main gear member at the first rotation speed and changing the rotation speed of the main gear member to the second rotation speed immediately before the first projecting member is positioned on the driven gear member side, the second rotation speed is obtained. The meshing with the driven gear member can be started by one protruding member. On the other hand, the main gear member is rotated at the first rotation speed, and the rotation speed of the main gear member is changed to the second rotation speed immediately before the second protruding member is positioned on the driven gear member side. Then, the second protruding member can start the meshing with the driven gear member.

換言すると、主動ギア部材の回転速度を上昇させるタイミングを任意に選択することで、突出部材の張出、没入のタイミングを任意に選択することができる。即ち、第1移動部材の移動開始時の移動速度が同じでも、第1移動部材の移動速度を上昇させるタイミングによって第2移動部材を移動させるタイミングを変化させることができる。これにより、第1移動部材の移動開始時の速度を確認するだけでその後の演出を予想することを困難とでき、第1移動部材および第2移動部材の動作の注目度を向上させることができる。従って、第1移動部材および第2移動部材の演出効果を向上させることができる。 In other words, by arbitrarily selecting the timing for increasing the rotational speed of the main gear member, the timing for projecting and immersing the protruding member can be arbitrarily selected. That is, even if the moving speed of the first moving member at the start of movement is the same, the timing of moving the second moving member can be changed by the timing of increasing the moving speed of the first moving member. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the subsequent effect only by checking the speed at the start of movement of the first moving member, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the movement of the first moving member and the second moving member. .. Therefore, the effect of the first moving member and the second moving member can be improved.

なお、第1突出部材と第2突出部材とが略同等な張出量で張り出す場合としては、第1突出部材と第2突出部材との質量が同等とされると共にそれぞれに作用される付勢力が同等とされる場合や、第1突出部材と第2突出部材との質量は異なるため主動ギア部材の回転により生じる径方向外向きの力は異なるが、その違いを解消する態様で各突出部材に作用される付勢力が変化される場合等が例示される。例えば、付勢力が弾性バネにより生じる場合には、第1突出部材に付勢力を与える弾性バネと第2突出部材に付勢力を与える弾性バネとのバネ定数を変化させることが例示される。 When the first projecting member and the second projecting member project with substantially the same amount of projecting, the masses of the first projecting member and the second projecting member are equal and act on each of them. When the forces are the same, or because the masses of the first protruding member and the second protruding member are different, the radial outward force generated by the rotation of the driving gear member is different, but each protrusion is in a manner that eliminates the difference. An example is a case where the urging force acting on the member is changed. For example, when the urging force is generated by the elastic spring, the spring constants of the elastic spring that gives the urging force to the first protruding member and the elastic spring that gives the urging force to the second protruding member are changed.

遊技機C2又はC3において、前記突出部材は、第1突出部材と、その第1突出部材と位相違いで形成されると共に前記主動ギア部材の回転途中で前記第1突出部材が前記従動ギア部材に近接した後で前記従動ギア部材に近接する第2突出部材と、を備え、それらの第1突出部材と第2突出部材とは前記主動ギア部材の回転により張り出される張出量が異なって形成され、前記主動ギア部材は、前記突出部材のうち、前記第1突出部材は没入状態を形成すると共に前記第2突出部材は前記張出状態を形成する分離回転速度と、前記第1突出部材および前記第2突出部材の双方が前記張出状態を形成する共同回転速度と、を形成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機C5。 In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the protruding member is formed in phase with the first protruding member and the first protruding member thereof, and the first protruding member becomes the driven gear member during rotation of the main gear member. A second projecting member that is close to the driven gear member after being brought close to the member is provided, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member are formed so that the amount of projecting is different due to the rotation of the driving gear member. In the driven gear member, among the projecting members, the first projecting member forms an embedded state, and the second projecting member forms the overhanging state, and the separated rotational speed, and the first projecting member and The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that both of the second protruding members can form a joint rotation speed that forms the overhanging state.

遊技機C5によれば、遊技機C2又はC3の奏する効果に加え、主動ギア部材の回転速度を回転中に変化させずに、第1突出部材で従動ギア部材に当接させる状態と、第2突出部材で従動ギア部材に当接させる状態とを形成することができる。 According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, a state in which the first protruding member is brought into contact with the driven gear member without changing the rotation speed of the driving gear member during rotation, and a second It is possible to form a state in which the protruding member is in contact with the driven gear member.

即ち、分離回転速度で主動ギア部材が定速回転されることで主動ギア部材は従動ギア部材に第2突出部材で歯合開始される。一方で、共同回転速度で主動ギア部材が回転されることで主動ギア部材は従動ギア部材に第1突出部材で歯合開始される。 That is, when the driving gear member is rotated at a constant speed at the separated rotation speed, the driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member at the second protruding member. On the other hand, when the driving gear member is rotated at the joint rotation speed, the driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member at the first protruding member.

即ち、第2移動部材が移動開始する時における第1移動部材の位置を変化させるために、駆動源の回転速度を主動ギア部材の回転途中に変化させる必要が無いので、駆動源の制御を単純化することができる。 That is, in order to change the position of the first moving member when the second moving member starts moving, it is not necessary to change the rotation speed of the driving source during the rotation of the driving gear member, so that the control of the driving source is simple. Can be transformed into.

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB7,C1からC5のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はスロットマシンであることを特徴とする遊技機D1。中でも、スロットマシンの基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の動的表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(ストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備えた遊技機」となる。この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。 A gaming machine D1 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, and C1 to C5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB7,C1からC5のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機であることを特徴とする遊技機D2。中でも、パチンコ遊技機の基本構成としては操作ハンドルを備え、その操作ハンドルの操作に応じて球を所定の遊技領域へ発射し、球が遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された作動口に入賞(又は作動口を通過)することを必要条件として、表示手段において動的表示されている識別情報が所定時間後に確定停止されるものが挙げられる。また、特別遊技状態の発生時には、遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された可変入賞装置(特定入賞口)が所定の態様で開放されて球を入賞可能とし、その入賞個数に応じた有価価値(景品球のみならず、磁気カードへ書き込まれるデータ等も含む)が付与されるものが挙げられる。 A gaming machine D2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, and C1 to C5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB7,C1からC5のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機とスロットマシンとを融合させたものであることを特徴とする遊技機D3。中でも、融合させた遊技機の基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備え、遊技媒体として球を使用すると共に、前記識別情報の動的表示の開始に際しては所定数の球を必要とし、特別遊技状態の発生に際しては多くの球が払い出されるように構成されている遊技機」となる。
<その他>
パチンコ機等の遊技機において、単一の駆動源の駆動力で移動される第1移動部材と第2移動部材とを備える遊技機がある(例えば特許文献1:特開2009−125092号公報)。
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、演出の数に改良の余地があるという問題点があった。
本技術的思想は、上記例示した問題点を解決するためになされたものであり、演出の数が改良された遊技機を提供することを目的とする。
<手段>
この目的を達成するために技術的思想1の遊技機は、駆動力を発生させる駆動源と、その駆動源の駆動力で回転される主動ギア部材と、その主動ギア部材の回転と連動して移動される第1移動部材と、前記主動ギア部材の回転の途中で前記主動ギア部材と連動して移動開始される従動ギア部材と、その従動ギア部材の移動と連動して移動される第2移動部材と、前記主動ギア部材および前記従動ギア部材の連動を開始させる調整装置と、を備え、前記第1移動部材は、移動基端から移動終端までの移動範囲で移動され、前記調整装置により前記従動ギア部材が前記主動ギア部材と連動して移動開始する時における前記第1移動部材の位置を複数形成可能である。
技術的思想2の遊技機は、技術的思想1記載の遊技機において、前記主動ギア部材と前記従動ギア部材との連動は歯合によるものであって、前記調整装置は、前記主動ギア部材に配設されると共に前記主動ギア部材の径方向に移動可能とされる突出部材を備え、その突出部材は、前記従動ギア部材に前記主動ギア部材の回転方向から当接可能な位置まで張り出す張出状態と、前記従動ギア部材に回転方向から当接不能な位置に配置される没入状態と、を形成可能とされ、前記突出部材が前記張出状態を形成しながら前記主動ギア部材が回転する場合に、前記従動ギア部材に前記突出部材が当接され、前記主動ギア部材と前記従動ギア部材との歯合が開始される。
技術的思想3の遊技機は、技術的思想2記載の遊技機において、前記突出部材は、前記主動ギア部材の回転軸側へ向けて生じる付勢力を受けることで少なくとも前記主動ギア部材の静止状態において前記没入状態を形成され、前記主動ギア部材を回転させる回転速度を切り替えることによって前記没入状態と前記張出状態とを切り替え可能に形成される。
<効果>
技術的思想1記載の遊技機によれば、演出の数を増やすことができる。
技術的思想2記載の遊技機によれば、技術的思想1記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、調整装置の突出部材が張出状態となるか、没入状態となるかによって、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との連動の仕方を異ならせることができる。
技術的思想3記載の遊技機によれば、技術的思想2記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、主動ギア部材と従動ギア部材との連動の制御を単純化することができる。
A gaming machine D3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, and C1 to C5, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that are moved by a driving force of a single driving source (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-12502). ..
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the number of effects.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an improved number of productions.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is interlocked with a drive source that generates a driving force, a driving gear member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving force, and the rotation of the driving gear member. The first moving member to be moved, the driven gear member that starts moving in conjunction with the driving gear member during the rotation of the driving gear member, and the second moving member that is moved in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member. A moving member and an adjusting device for starting interlocking of the driving gear member and the driven gear member are provided, and the first moving member is moved within a moving range from the moving base end to the moving end, and is moved by the adjusting device. It is possible to form a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the driving gear member.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the interlocking of the driving gear member and the driven gear member is due to the meshing, and the adjusting device is attached to the driving gear member. It is provided with a protruding member that is arranged and is movable in the radial direction of the driving gear member, and the protruding member extends from the rotational direction of the driving gear member to a position where it can come into contact with the driven gear member. It is possible to form a protruding state and an immersive state in which the driven gear member is arranged at a position where it cannot come into contact with the driven gear member from the direction of rotation, and the driving gear member rotates while the protruding member forms the protruding state. In this case, the protruding member is brought into contact with the driven gear member, and the engagement between the driven gear member and the driven gear member is started.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the protruding member receives at least a stationary state of the driving gear member by receiving an urging force generated toward the rotation axis side of the driving gear member. In, the immersive state is formed, and the immersive state and the overhang state can be switched by switching the rotation speed for rotating the main gear member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the number of productions can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the main gear member and the main gear member depend on whether the protruding member of the adjusting device is in the overhanging state or the immersive state. The way of interlocking with the driven gear member can be changed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the control of interlocking between the main gear member and the driven gear member can be simplified.

10 パチンコ機(遊技機)
13 遊技盤
410,2410 ベース部材
420,2420 スライド部材(第1移動部材)
422,2422 被伝達脚部(第2ギア部材、移動当接部材)
422a ラックギア(ギア歯)
422c,2422c 前側壁部(板状部)
422d,2422d 切り欠き部
452,3452,4452,5452,6452,7452,8452 二層ギア(主動ギア部材)
452b1,3452b1,4452b1,5452b1 始動ギア歯(噛み合い歯)
452b2,4452b2 中間ギア歯(中間歯)
452b3 第1窪み部(窪み部)
453,3453,4453,5453,7453 反転ギア(従動ギア部材)
453c 円弧状凹部(保持機構、切り欠き部)
453d 係合突状受け部
460 半月部材(第2移動部材)
471a 規制壁部(規制部)
471b 規制壁部(規制部)
472 駆動モータ(駆動源)
473 駆動ギア(第1ギア部材)
7452e 突出ギア部材(突出部材、調整装置の一部)
7452e1 第1突出ギア部材(第1突出部材、調整装置の一部)
7452e2 第2突出ギア部材(第2突出部材、調整装置の一部)
V1 第1回転速度
V2 第2回転速度
V3 分離回転速度
V4 共同回転速度
10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 410, 2410 Base member 420, 2420 Slide member (first moving member)
422,2422 Transmitted leg (second gear member, moving contact member)
422a rack gear (gear teeth)
422c, 2422c Front side wall (plate-shaped part)
422d, 2422d Notch 452,3452,4452,5452,6452,7452,8452 Two-layer gear (main gear member)
452b1,3452b1,4452b1,5452b1 Starting gear teeth (meshing teeth)
452b2, 4452b2 Intermediate gear teeth (intermediate teeth)
452b3 1st recess (recess)
453,3453,4453,5453,7453 Reversing gear (driven gear member)
453c Arc-shaped recess (holding mechanism, notch)
453d Engagement projectile receiving part 460 Half-moon member (second moving member)
471a Regulatory wall (regulatory department)
471b Regulatory wall part (regulatory part)
472 Drive motor (drive source)
473 Drive gear (first gear member)
7452e Protruding gear member (protruding member, part of adjustment device)
7452e1 1st protruding gear member (1st protruding member, part of adjustment device)
7452e2 2nd protruding gear member (2nd protruding member, part of adjustment device)
V1 1st rotation speed V2 2nd rotation speed V3 Separate rotation speed V4 Joint rotation speed

Claims (2)

ベース部材と、そのベース部材に支持される第1ギア部材および第2ギア部材とを備え、
少なくとも前記第1ギア部材は第1軸を中心に回転可能とされ、
前記第1ギア部材および第2ギア部材は、
前記第1軸と直交する所定平面に沿った動作方向で動作可能に前記ベース部材に支持される本体部と、
その本体部から前記動作方向に対して前記所定平面上で交差する方向へ張り出される張出部と、を備え、
前記第1ギア部材または第2ギア部材の一方の部材の有する前記張出部は、前記動作方向の面が前記第1ギア部材または第2ギア部材の他方の部材の有する前記張出部に当接可能に構成され、前記他方の部材を押進可能に構成され、
前記第2ギア部材は、前記張出部の前記第1軸方向の側面に覆設される板状部を備え、
その板状部が、前記第1軸方向視において前記第1ギア部材の前記張出部であって前記第2ギア部材と当接している前記張出部に重なり可能に形成される遊技機であって、
前記板状部は、前記第2ギア部材の前記張出部の張出先端側から張出基端側へえぐられて形成される切り欠き部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機。
A base member and a first gear member and a second gear member supported by the base member are provided.
At least the first gear member is rotatable about the first axis.
The first gear member and the second gear member are
A main body that is supported by the base member so that it can operate in an operating direction along a predetermined plane orthogonal to the first axis.
It is provided with an overhanging portion extending from the main body portion in a direction intersecting the predetermined plane with respect to the operating direction.
The projecting portion having the one member of said first gear member and the second gear member, those in the overhang portion a surface of the operation direction with the other member of said first gear member and the second gear member It is configured so that it can be contacted, and the other member can be pushed forward.
The second gear member includes a plate-shaped portion that is overlaid on the side surface of the overhanging portion in the first axial direction.
A gaming machine in which the plate-shaped portion is formed so as to be overlapped with the overhanging portion of the first gear member in the first axial direction and in contact with the second gear member. There,
The plate-shaped portion is a gaming machine including a notch portion formed by being scooped out from the overhanging end end side to the overhanging base end side of the overhanging portion of the second gear member.
基板ボックスを備えることを特徴とする請求項1記載の遊技機。The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.
JP2019151639A 2018-04-19 2019-08-22 Pachinko machine Expired - Fee Related JP6933232B2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019151639A JP6933232B2 (en) 2018-04-19 2019-08-22 Pachinko machine
JP2021134313A JP2021183170A (en) 2019-08-22 2021-08-19 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018080313A JP6575632B2 (en) 2018-04-19 2018-04-19 Game machine
JP2019151639A JP6933232B2 (en) 2018-04-19 2019-08-22 Pachinko machine

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2018080313A Division JP6575632B2 (en) 2018-04-19 2018-04-19 Game machine

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2021134313A Division JP2021183170A (en) 2019-08-22 2021-08-19 Game machine

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2019195715A JP2019195715A (en) 2019-11-14
JP2019195715A5 JP2019195715A5 (en) 2020-09-17
JP6933232B2 true JP6933232B2 (en) 2021-09-08

Family

ID=68537827

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2019151639A Expired - Fee Related JP6933232B2 (en) 2018-04-19 2019-08-22 Pachinko machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6933232B2 (en)

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5422166B2 (en) * 2008-09-26 2014-02-19 株式会社ニューギン Game machine directing device
JP5497502B2 (en) * 2010-03-19 2014-05-21 日本ぱちんこ部品株式会社 Movable direction device for gaming machine and gaming machine equipped with the same
JP5188599B2 (en) * 2011-04-27 2013-04-24 京楽産業.株式会社 Pachinko machine
JP5492250B2 (en) * 2012-05-18 2014-05-14 京楽産業.株式会社 Game machine
JP6413321B2 (en) * 2014-04-30 2018-10-31 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine
JP6213533B2 (en) * 2015-08-10 2017-10-18 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2019195715A (en) 2019-11-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2021183170A (en) Game machine
JP6485511B2 (en) Game machine
JP6413321B2 (en) Game machine
JP6213533B2 (en) Game machine
JP6326944B2 (en) Game machine
JP6413322B2 (en) Game machine
JP6933232B2 (en) Pachinko machine
JP6648797B2 (en) Gaming machine
JP2020054917A5 (en)
JP2019195715A5 (en)
JP2018202225A (en) Game machine
JP6575632B2 (en) Game machine
JP2020054917A (en) Gaming machine
JP2020114551A (en) Game machine
JP2020073140A (en) Game machine
JP2020073138A (en) Game machine
JP2020073139A (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20190823

A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20190924

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20200805

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A132

Effective date: 20201027

A601 Written request for extension of time

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A601

Effective date: 20201228

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20210226

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20210720

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20210802

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 6933232

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

LAPS Cancellation because of no payment of annual fees